JP2013106805A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of a game, the game machine being represented by a pinball game machine (Pachinko machine) and a reel game machine (slot machine).SOLUTION: The Pachinko machine 100 includes a variable winning hole 234 as a winning means, and a decoration symbol display device 208 and a speaker 120 as notification means capable of executing a notification corresponding to information relating to the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning hole 234. The decoration symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 are configured to execute excess information collectively in prescribed times, the excess information corresponding to information relating to the number of game balls when the number of game balls having entered the variable winning hole 234 exceeds the prescribed number.

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, a game table that performs various effects to enhance the interest of games is known (Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  In the conventional game stand, various effects are performed even during the big hit game. For example, an effect for notifying the probability change and an effect for causing the player to operate a predetermined operation means are performed.

  The objective of this invention is providing the game stand which can raise the interest of the game in jackpot game.

The above-described object is a gaming machine equipped with winning means, and is capable of executing a predetermined notification when a game ball wins the winning means during a closed state that is started after the open state is continued for a predetermined time. Achieved by a game stand characterized by
Further, the object is a gaming table provided with winning means, comprising notifying means capable of notifying corresponding to information relating to the number of game balls won in the winning means, wherein the notifying means comprises the winning means It is achieved by a game stand characterized in that it is possible to execute a surplus notification corresponding to information related to the number of game balls when the number of game balls won in the game exceeds a predetermined number in a predetermined time. The

  According to the present invention, the interest of the player can be improved.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display pattern in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of a stop display design of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decoration design, (c) FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a normal stop display pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is 1st. The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, (c) shows the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the first sub control unit image processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is 2nd. The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the data table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows an example of the determination table used at the time of high probability, (b ) Shows an example of the success / failure determination table used when the probability is low, and (c) shows an example of the special figure determination table. The open state and closing condition list table of the variable prize opening 234 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention are shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of the jackpot start command reception in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part prize ball acquisition information production | generation process at the time of variable winning opening winning command reception in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of the round designation | designated command reception in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The flow of the special figure EF prize alerting | reporting process in the 1st sub control part prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of variable prize opening winning command reception in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention is shown. It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of the jackpot end command reception in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part flag setting process at the time of variable winning opening closing command reception in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a table which shows the predetermined | prescribed alerting | reporting effect list of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the predetermined | prescribed alerting | reporting effect list of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is FIG. (2) explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is FIG. (3) explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is FIG. (4) explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is FIG. (5) explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is FIG. (6) explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of one embodiment of the present invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 900 of the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game machine by the modification of one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is a portable provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. A telephone 3000 is shown, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The outer rail 202 extends from the top of the effect device 206 to the right, and a game ball can fly to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200 through the space between the upper portion of the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. In other words, the game area 124 has a left-handed downflow path on the left side of the effect device 206 as a decoration member as a path through which the launched game ball flows down, and a decoration member as a path through which the launched game ball flows down. And a right-handed downflow path on the right side.

  The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the normal symbol. A holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high-probability state. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (wins in the general winning holes 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball that is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball that is lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged in the (Right down flow path). Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  The special figure 1 starting port 230 is disposed in the lower center of the game board 200 in this embodiment. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, the special figure 1 starting port 231 is disposed above a special figure 2 starting port 232 described later in the present embodiment. Since the special figure 1 starting port 231 has the same function as the special figure 1 starting port 230, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chow), and in this embodiment, only one is provided below the general drawing starting port 228 and on the right side of the game board 200 (the right downflow path). doing. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a sphere. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure variable game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The normal start port 228 and the special view 2 start port 232 below the normal start port 228 are in the right handed down flow path on the right side with the effect device 206 interposed therebetween, so the left hand flow down route on the left side with the effect device 206 is advanced. The game ball does not pass through the normal figure starting port 228 or win the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged at intervals shorter than the diameter of the game ball on the right downflow path side of the special FIG. For this reason, game balls that have advanced to the right-handed downflow path side do not win the special figure 1 starting port 232. Therefore, only the game balls that have advanced on the left-handed flow path can win the special figure 1 starting port 230. In addition, a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged above the special figure 1 starting port 231. Therefore, it is relatively difficult for the game ball to win the special figure 1 starting port 231.

  The variable winning opening 234 constituting the winning means is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display devices 212 and 214 win the special figure variable game. Is stopped and displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 25 seconds, a closing time of 1.0 second) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  A sensor (not shown) that constitutes the game ball detection means and detects a game ball that has won the variable winning opening 234 is formed on the left side of the bottom of the variable winning opening 234 and communicates with the back side of the pachinko machine 100 (for example) (Not shown). Further, the bottom portion of the variable winning opening 234 is inclined downward from the right side to the left side. For this reason, the variable winning opening 234 is configured such that a game ball can be easily won from the right side which is the upstream side to the opening where the sensor is arranged. When the sensor detects a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls, and when the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is established, the time when the sensor detects the predetermined number (for example, 10th) of the game balls There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball has reached the upstream side (right side) of the variable winning opening 234. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a game board 200 including a variable winning opening 234 that is easy to win over a predetermined number (for example, 10), that is, so-called over-winning. Since the bottom portion of the variable winning opening 234 is inclined downward toward the opening where the sensor is disposed, the game balls that have won more than a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 are within an interval time (described later). The sensor is promptly detected.

  A plurality of game nails 238 are arranged at intervals shorter than the diameter of the game ball on the left-handed downflow side of the variable winning opening 234. For this reason, game balls that have advanced to the left-handed downflow path side will not win the variable winning opening 234. Therefore, only the game ball that has advanced on the right-handed flow path can enter the variable winning opening 234.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The firing rod 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and launches into the left-handed downflow path or the right-handed downflow path of the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 moves down the left-handed down flow path or the right-handed down flow path while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. Winning a prize opening 226, variable prize opening 234) or starting opening (Special Figure 1 starting opening 230, Special Figure 2 starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or normal start Only passing through the mouth 228 reaches the out mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. A warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll on the front side of the stage device 206, and the stage movable body 224 (not shown in FIG. 3) in the area where the game ball cannot roll. ). In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body. The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been picked up by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball passes to the special opening 1 230 in the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 212 or the special symbol 2 display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a special figure 1 retention lamp 218, a special figure 2 retention lamp 220, and a high-accuracy medium lamp 222) And the like, and a variety of solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A driving circuit 334 is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. Note that the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to one-way communication from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and bidirectionally transmits signals such as commands between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400. You may be comprised so that transmission is possible.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from 426 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data, and image data stored in the ROM 406 based on signals from the CPU 404, and the VRAM 436 are read out. Display images using the work area And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 forms (Video Display Processor), is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and frequency. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 502 also includes a ROM 506 storing control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like, and drive control for the effect movable body 224. Control of drive circuit 516, effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of effect movable body 224, sensor circuit 518 that outputs a detection signal from effect movable body sensor 424 to basic circuit 502, and control of game board lamp 532 A game board lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, a game board lamp driving circuit 530, and a game table frame lamp driving circuit. A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication with the 540 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5C, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time in the present embodiment) elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, When the variation time determined before the start of the variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time in the present embodiment) has elapsed, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special illustration 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display referred to in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. “Special Figure A” is a 16-round (16R) special jackpot symbol. “Special Figure B” and “Special Figure C” are 16R jackpot symbols called rank-up bonuses. "Special figure D" is a 16R big hit symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Also, after the 16R special big hit game ends and after the 16R big hit game ends, the state shifts to the electric support state (sometimes referred to as a time-short state). Although the electric support state will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the electric support state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the electric support state is referred to as a normal low probability state.

  “Special Figure A”, which is a 16R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” and “Special Figure C”, which are 16R jackpot symbols (rank-up bonus), are in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. Also, “Special Figure D” which is a 16R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. "Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state. “Special figure F” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These “special illustrations A” to “special illustrations F” are symbols in which the degree of advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the big hit without 2R electric support. That is, the opening pattern of the variable winning opening 234 of “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” is substantially the same as the opening pattern of the variable winning opening 234 of the jackpot game of “Special Figure F”. The effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different, and even in the same state, by providing “special drawing G”, “special drawing H”, and “special drawing F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, which is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 16R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 16R jackpot symbols.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss in the determination of success / failure, and then, based on the result of the determination of success / failure, It is configured to determine which of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” is to be stopped and displayed on Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 display devices 212 and 214 after the symbol variation display. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display, so that the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game (for example, the special figure certain change state) The presence / absence of the power supply and the presence / absence of the electric support state are automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this. For example, apart from the determination of the stop symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game may be determined by lottery. The pachinko machine 100, for example, automatically determines the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the stop symbol is determined, whereas the pachinko machine 100 automatically determines the profit state after the jackpot game by lottery. The profit status may be appropriately associated.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 16R special jackpot of “special drawing A” or 16R big jackpot of “special drawing D”, a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 2- “Decoration 2—decoration 2”, “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When the 16R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols having the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7”). -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 16R jackpot, which is called a rank-up bonus for “Special Figure B” and “Special Figure C”, “Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, 2R big hit called “sudden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, 2R big hit called “Short Time” of “Special Figure F”, or 1st small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1−decoration 2−decoration 3” or “decoration 1−decoration 3−decoration 5” is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG.5 (c), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which light-extinguishes, and the black-colored part has shown the location of the segment which lights up.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, when it is determined whether or not it is a big hit or not, a random number value for determining a special figure for winning time used for a lottery to determine a stop symbol in special figure variable games is generated. The initial value generating random number counter for generating the initial value of the winning special figure determining random number counter (hereinafter referred to as “initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter”). ). Also, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a universal winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number for use in determining whether or not a normal floating game is successful (hereinafter referred to as “corresponding to the normal winning random counter”). "Initial value generation random number counter"). For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the random number value for determining the special figure for hitting is 0 to 99, the value is stored from the initial value generating random number counter storage area corresponding to the random number counter for determining the special figure for winning hour provided in the RAM 308. Acquire, add 1 to the acquired value, and store in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the usual winning random number counter is updated in the same manner. Note that the initial value generating random number counters corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter and the common winning random number counter are also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If there is a match with the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the normal figure starting opening 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205 and in step S209 subsequent thereto, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process in step S207, the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter and the universal winning random number counter respectively performed in step S115 is updated. In the basic random number update process in step S209, the winning special figure determining random number counter and the regular winning random number counter used in the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as random numbers for determining a special figure for hitting is 0 to 99, a random number counter for determining a special figure for hitting provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate a random number for determining a special figure for hitting hours Is obtained, and 1 is added to the obtained value, which is then stored in the original random number counter for determining a hit special figure. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter for determining a hit time special figure. In addition, when it is determined as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value that the winning-time special figure determining random number counter makes a round, the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter Is set in the random counter for determining the special figure for winning hour. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for hitting special figure determination that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for determining the winning hour figure, and The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to set the figure-determining random number counter and to determine that the winning-time special figure determining random number counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the winning special figure determining random number counter has made one round next, an initial value for determining that the common winning random number counter has made one round A storage area is provided in the RAM 308. The hit special figure determining random number counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same. The counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the special figure timer number determination random number counter for generating the special figure timer number determination random number value for determining the symbol variation time in the special figure variation game is updated. In addition, a random number counter for determining a general timer number for generating a random number value for determining a general timer number for determining a symbol variation time in the general variable game is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is obtained and provided in the RAM 308. The hit special figure determining random value is obtained from the hit special figure determining random number counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 1 random number value for determining hit and random number value for determining special figure for winning hour (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") Are stored for the same number as the number of reserved special figure 1 stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the special figure 2 of 318 is acquired, and the hit time special feature provided in the RAM 308 is acquired. The random number value for hit special figure determination is acquired from the random number counter for figure determination and is stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 2 random number value for determining hit and random number value for determining special figure for winning time (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 random value group" or "special figure 2 start information") Are stored for the same number as the number of reserved special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number decreases, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remaining special figure 2 random value Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value as the normal figure winning random number value. Stored in the random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (common symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (c)) and the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 milliseconds (ms)). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off as will be described later. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the result of the usual figure variation game is won or not by the random lottery based on the usual figure winning random number value stored in the above random number value storage area. When a winning determination is made and the winning combination is made, ON is set to the common winning flag provided in the RAM 308. In the case of unsuccessful election, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the turning on / off of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 3 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with special flag A flag to special figure J flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, and ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the special figure A flag is on When the special figure A and special figure B flags shown in FIG. 5A are turned on, the special figure B, when the special figure C flag is turned on, the special figure C and when the special figure D flag are turned on, the special figure B is turned on. FIG. D, special figure E when special figure E flag is on, special figure F when special figure F flag is on, special figure G and special figure H flag when special figure G flag is on The special figure 2 display device 214 has a special figure H when the special figure H is on, a special figure I when the special figure I flag is on, and a special figure J when the special figure J flag is on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308 It performs constant. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures A to J. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 25 seconds) Or, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected at the variable prize opening 234, a door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.0 second) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (16 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count is not set in the power support count storage section, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. Here, the electric support state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The control state due to the universal figure change, the universal figure change, and the electric Chu extension is collectively referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of special figure 2 variable games held is larger than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), a special figure 2 random value pair is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. With reference to the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a) or FIG. 10 (b) with respect to the random number value for hit determination in the set of special figure 2 random values, the big hit or the small hit is determined. Or whether it is off. Next, when the determination result is a big hit or a small hit, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure determination random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area obtained as shown in FIG. With reference to the figure determination table, the symbol to be stopped (stopped symbol) is determined after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is displayed. Although details will be described later, if the result of the determination is wrong, a random symbol value for determining a missing symbol is obtained separately, and the random symbol value is referred to the special symbol determining table shown in FIG. To decide.

  After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  The special drawing 1 related lottery process (step S231) is also the same as the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, FRAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the special data A flag to special graphic J flag values, the special graphic probability variation flag values, the special data stored in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300 are included in the command data. The special figure timer number selected in the figure-related lottery process is included. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop command, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of a special probability round flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the special figure A flag to special figure J flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure stored in the RAM 308 as command data. 2. Information indicating the number of special figure timer numbers selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of the special figure A flag to the special figure J flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increasing process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 after step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, if pressing of the chance button is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button is performed.

  In step S313 following step S311, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315 subsequent to step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317 following step S315, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319 following step S317, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321 following step S319, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of random numbers for other effects, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603 following step S601, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. Wait for the input signal to be input. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607 following step S605, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609 following step S607, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  The process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703 subsequent to step S701, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. . In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707 following step S705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S711 subsequent to step S709, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713 following step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle. In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The data table shown in FIG. 10 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B are the pass / fail judgment processing of special figure 2 or special figure 1 in special figure 2 or special figure 1 related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. An example of the use determination table used is shown. FIG. 10A shows a table used during the special figure high probability, and FIG. 10B shows a table used during the special figure low probability. FIG. 10C shows a special figure determination table used for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed after the end of symbol variation.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B includes items of “special figure probability” in the first column from the left, “random number range” in the second column, and “result of success” in the third column. It consists of “High probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 10A indicates that the control state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values: a numerical value 0 to 10,000, a numerical value 10001 to 11638, a numerical value 11639 to 11940, and a numerical value 11941 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of success / failure” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to 10000, “out” is assigned to the values 11941 to 65535, “hits” is assigned to the values 10001 to 11638, “Small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 11639 to 11940.

  The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 10B indicates that the control state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10162, a numerical value 10163 to 10464, and a numerical value 10465 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of success / failure” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10465 to 65535, “hits” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10162, “Small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10163 to 10464.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses the acquired winning judgment to determine whether the result of the floating game shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. Whether or not the random number is determined is determined by referring to the determination table. For example, if the control state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads the high probability table for determination of correctness shown in FIG. In the case of the low-probability state, the validity determination low-probability table shown in FIG. 10B is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 10C shows a special figure determination table. The special figure determination table is composed of items of “result determination / determination result”, “symbol random number range”, and “stop symbol” from the left column. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the success / failure determination using the special figure success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10A or FIG. As a result of the success / failure determination using the determination table, it shows a case where it is determined as “small hit”, and “out of” indicates a case where it is determined as “out of” as a result of the determination of success / failure using the special figure determination table. Show.

  The item “symbol random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 10C indicates the numerical value range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special random number value for winning hour determination or the random symbol value for losing symbol determination. The “design random number range” corresponds to the item “big hit” in the left column “result determination result”, the numerical value 0-49, the numerical value 50-53, the numerical value 54-59, the numerical value 60-79, the numerical value 80-89 and It is divided into six values of 90 to 99, and is divided into two values of 0 to 49 and 50 to 99 corresponding to “small hit”, and values of 0 to 49 and numerical values corresponding to “out of”. It is divided into two of 50-99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 10C represents a stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. The “stop symbol” corresponds to “special symbol A” corresponding to the value “0” to “49” and “special symbol B” corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 53 and “special symbol B” corresponding to the numerical value 54 to 59. "Special figure C", "Special figure D" corresponding to numerical values 60-79, "Special figure E" corresponding to numerical values 80-89, and "Special figure F" corresponding to numerical values 90-99 Each design aspect is assigned. In addition, the “stop symbol” has “stop symbol” and the symbol random number range is “Special Figure G” corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 49, and “Special Figure H” corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 99. Each is assigned. Furthermore, the “stop symbol” has “stop” and the symbol random number ranges from “0” to “49” in the “random symbol” range. Assigned.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 may display the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 when the determination result based on winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit. It is determined with reference to the special figure determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for special figure for winning at the time of which one of the special symbols A to F is to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display when the determination result based on winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a small hit. Whether the special symbol G or the special symbol H is to be stopped and displayed on the device 214 is determined with reference to the special diagram determining table with respect to the acquired random number for determining the special symbol for hitting.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device when the determination result based on winning in the special figure 1 start port 230 or the special figure 2 start port 232 is out of place. It is determined with reference to the special figure determination table with respect to the acquired random symbol value for determining the symbol to be stopped, which one of the special symbol patterns I and J is to be stopped and displayed in 214. Note that the random symbol value for losing symbol determination is acquired from the random symbol counter for losing symbol determination provided in the RAM 308 when determining the symbol for stopping detachment.

  Next, the open state and closing conditions of the variable winning opening 234 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The table shown in FIG. 11 includes items of “special drawing type” in the first column from the left, “variable winning opening opening pattern” in the second column, and “variable winning opening closing condition for one time” in the third column. It consists of The “type of special figure” in the first column indicates a symbol that is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 after the special figure variable game is completed. The “variable winning opening opening pattern” in the second column indicates the opening pattern of the variable winning opening 234 (one opening time × the number of opening in 1R × the number of rounds) in the winning game (including the big hit and the small hit). Yes. The third column “Condition for closing one variable winning opening” indicates the closing condition (predetermined time elapse or predetermined number of game balls won) for the variable winning opening 234 for one opening in a winning game.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A”, the “variable winning opening opening pattern” is “25 s (one open time (seconds)) × 1 (in 1R). Number of times of opening) × 16 times (number of rounds) ”, and“ the closing condition of the variable winning opening for one time ”is“ 25 seconds or 10 winnings ”. When the “special drawing type” is “special drawing B”, the “variable winning opening opening pattern” is “1 s (one opening time (seconds)) × 3 (number of opening in 1R) × 16 times. (Number of rounds) "and" Conditions for closing a variable prize opening for one time "are" 1 seconds passed or 10 prizes in 1R ". When the “special drawing type” is “special drawing C”, the “variable winning opening opening pattern” is “1 s (one opening time (seconds)) × 2 (number of opening in 1R) × 16 times. (Number of rounds) "and" Conditions for closing a variable prize opening for one time "are" 1 seconds passed or 10 prizes in 1R ". When the “special drawing type” is “special drawing D”, the “variable winning opening opening pattern” is “25 s (one opening time (seconds)) × 1 (number of opening in 1R) × 16 times. (Number of rounds) ”and“ Condition for closing a variable prize opening for one time ”is“ 25 seconds or 10 winnings ”. When the “special drawing type” is “special drawing E”, the “variable winning opening opening pattern” is “0.4 s (one opening time (seconds)) × 1 (number of opening in 1R) × “2 times (number of rounds)”, and “the closing condition of the variable prize opening for one time” is “0.4 seconds or 10 winnings”. When the “special drawing type” is “special drawing F”, the “variable winning opening opening pattern” is “0.4 s (one opening time (seconds)) × 1 (number of opening in 1R) × “2 times (number of rounds)”, and “the closing condition of the variable prize opening for one time” is “0.4 seconds or 10 winnings”. When the “special drawing type” is “special drawing G” or “special drawing H”, there is no concept of round in the winning game. Therefore, when the “special drawing type” is “special drawing G”, the “variable winning opening opening pattern” is “0.39 s (one opening time (seconds)) × 2 times (opening times)”. "The condition for closing the variable prize opening for one time" is "10 wins after 0.39 s or 2 times (2 open times)". When the “special drawing type” is “special drawing H”, the “variable winning opening opening pattern” is “0.39 s (one opening time (seconds)) × 2 times (opening times)”. Thus, “the condition for closing the variable prize opening for one time” becomes “10 wins after 0.39 s or two times (two open times)”.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a predetermined time (for example, 25 s, 1 s, 0.4 s, 0.39 s) and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls as the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234. There are two types of conditions for winning. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the control state of the variable winning opening 234 is shifted from the open state to the closed state based on the previously established condition among the one type of conditions.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of prize balls is set to 15 for one winning game ball to the variable prize opening 234. Excluding over winnings, the maximum number of winnings in one round is, for example, 10. Therefore, the maximum number of winning balls in one round is 150 in “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”. In addition, excluding over winnings, the maximum number of winnings in a single small hit game is 10, so the maximum number of winning balls in the small hit game in “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” is 150. It is. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the interval time in the big hit game is set to 2.5 s. The interval time refers to the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round. The pachinko machine 100 receives the variable prize so that the game balls won after the start of the next round after the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is established and the door member 234a is closed are not detected by the game ball detection means. The interval time is set so that a sufficient amount of time can be secured for the game ball detecting means to detect the winning game ball immediately before the door member 234a is closed after the closing condition of the mouth 234 is established.

  Next, the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The first sub control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process shown in FIGS. 12 to 16 is executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. First, the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot start command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a flow of first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation processing when a big hit start command is received. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the RAM 408 and the like by the CPU 404 to execute the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit start command. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving a big hit start command, first, it is determined which of the special figures A to D is won (step S1001). For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the values of the special figure A to special figure F flags transmitted from the main control unit 300 and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and any one of the special figure A to special figure D flags. If one of the values is “1”, it is determined that one of the special drawings A to D is won, and the process proceeds to step S1003, and any one of the special drawings E and F flags is “1”. ”, It is determined that none of the special drawings A to D is won, and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit start command is terminated without executing step S1003. To do.

  In step S1003 following step S1001, accumulated prize ball acquisition information including the number of prize balls acquired in one big hit game is transmitted to a control board (not shown) that controls the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the winning ball acquisition information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 in step S1405 of FIG. 16 described later, and acquires the accumulated winning ball including the accumulated number of winning balls. The information is transmitted to the control board, and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit start command is terminated. Thereby, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed at a predetermined location in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the present embodiment, in the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit start command, only the winning ball acquisition information accumulated at the time of 16R big hit is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 continuously executes 100 special figure variation games in the short-time state, and executes both of the ordinary-probability variation flag and the short-time flag being changed to the off state. The accumulated prize ball acquisition information stored in the RAM 408 is cleared at the start of the special figure variable game.

  Next, the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process when the variable winning opening winning command is received by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation processing when a variable winning opening winning command is received. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the main control unit 300 determines that a game ball has won the variable prize opening 234, the main control unit 300, in step S233 of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 controls the RAM 408 and the like by the CPU 404 and executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process when a variable winning award winning command is received.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process upon receiving a variable winning opening winning command, first, when there is a winning game ball at the variable winning opening 234, 10 winning game balls have already been won. It is determined whether or not there has been (step S1101). For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the winning number information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 in one round included in the winning number information. If it is determined that the number of winning prizes is less than 10, the process proceeds to step S1103. If it is determined that the number of winning prizes is not less than 10, that is, 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1103 following step S1101, the number of wins is increased by one. For example, since the first sub-control unit 400 has 10 or less, which is the predetermined number of balls, in the variable winning opening 234, the number of winnings included in the winning number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 Is increased by 1, and the number-of-wins information including the number of winnings after the increase is stored again in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the process proceeds to step S1115.

  On the other hand, in step S1105 subsequent to step S1101, the surplus number indicating how many predetermined number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 234 in one round is increased by one. For example, since the first sub-control unit 400 has already won 10 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 and the number of winning balls exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10), The surplus number included in the stored surplus number information is increased by 1, and the surplus number information including the surplus number after the increase is stored again in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107 subsequent to step S1105, it is determined whether or not the shortage cumulative number indicating how much the number of game balls received in the variable winning opening 234 is less than a predetermined number in one big hit game is greater than zero. . For example, when the first sub-control unit 400 reads the value of the insufficient cumulative number stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and determines that the value is greater than 0, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a predetermined number of game balls in the variable winning opening 234. It is determined that there is no winning, and the number of winning game balls is insufficient, and the process proceeds to step S1109. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0, that is, “0”, it is determined that the number of winnings is not insufficient, and the process proceeds to step S1113.

  In step S1109 following step S1107, the surplus number increased by 1 in step S1105 is decreased by 1. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reduces the surplus number included in the surplus number information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 by 1, and stores the surplus number information including the reduced surplus number in the RAM 408 according to a predetermined storage. It memorize | stores in an area | region again and transfers to step S1111.

  In step S1111 following step S1109, the shortage cumulative number is decreased by one. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reduces the shortage accumulated number included in the shortage accumulated number information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 by 1, and stores the shortage accumulated number information including the reduced shortage accumulated number in the RAM 408. The data is stored again in the predetermined storage area, and the process proceeds to step S1115. The pachinko machine 100 executes step S1109 and step S1111 to reduce the shortage of winning game balls during the big hit game or the small hit game currently being executed by winning the game ball to the variable winning opening 234 this time. Only 1 is replenished from the surplus number.

  On the other hand, in step S1113 following step S1107, the surplus cumulative number is increased by one. For example, since the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 is not insufficient, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the surplus accumulated number included in the surplus accumulated number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. The surplus accumulated number information including the surplus accumulated number after the increment is increased by 1 and stored again in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generating process at the time of receiving the variable winning award winning command is completed. . The surplus cumulative number is the number of winnings that exceed a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 per round) to the variable winning opening 234 that can be won in one big hit game. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of winning balls obtained based on the surplus cumulative number is collectively notified after the big hit game is over.

  In step S1115 subsequent to step S1103 or step S1111, a prize ball acquisition information command is transmitted to the control board that controls the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a winning ball acquisition information command including information on the number of winning balls in the big hit game to the control board, and acquires the first sub-control unit winning ball when the variable winning opening winning command is received. The information generation process ends. As a result, the winning ball acquisition number is displayed in the winning ball acquisition number display area 800 (described later) of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Next, the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation processing when the round designation command is received by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a flow of first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation processing when a round designation command is received. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the RAM 408 and the like by the CPU 404, receives the round designation command at the start of the round, and executes the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process. It has become.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the variable in the previous round within the period from the end of one round in the jackpot game to the start of the next round after receiving the round designation command, that is, within the interval time. An effective period for allowing a game ball to be awarded to the winning opening 234 is set. The pachinko machine 100 is configured to be able to arbitrarily set the extension or shortening of the effective period within the interval time. For this reason, the longest effective period is an interval time.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command, first, during the jackpot game executed by winning one of the special figures A to D It is determined whether or not there is (step S1201). For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the values of the special figure A to special figure F flags transmitted from the main control unit 300 and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, respectively, and the special figure A to special figure D flag. If any one of the values is “1”, it is determined that a big hit game based on any of the special figures A to D is in effect, and the process proceeds to step S1203. If any one value is “1”, it is determined that the big hit game based on any one of the special figures A to D is not being played, and the process proceeds to step S1205 for executing the special figure EF winning notification process. .

  In step S1203 subsequent to step S1201, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of ten game balls have been won in the variable winning slot 234 in the previous round. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads out the winning number information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the number of winnings included in the winning number information is less than 10 and the variable winning in the previous round. If it is determined that the number of winning game balls to the mouth 234 is insufficient, the process proceeds to step S1207, where the number of winning is 10 or more and the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 in the previous round is insufficient. If it is determined that there is no, the process proceeds to step S1217.

  In step S1207 following step S1203, it is determined whether or not the shortage of the number of winnings to the variable winning opening 234 in the previous round can be supplemented. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the value of the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the value is greater than 0 and is a variable prize in the previous round. If it is determined that the shortage of the number of winnings to the mouth 234 can be replenished, the process proceeds to step S1209. If the value is not greater than 0, that is, the value is 0 and the shortage cannot be replenished, the process proceeds to step S1215. To do.

  In step S1209 subsequent to step S1207, the surplus cumulative number is reduced by 1 in order to supplement the shortage of the number of winnings to the variable winning opening 234 in the previous round by one. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reduces the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 by 1 in order to supplement the shortage cumulative number by 1 from the surplus cumulative number, The surplus cumulative number information including the surplus cumulative number after the reduction is stored again in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the process proceeds to step S1211.

  In step S1211 following step S1209, since the shortage of the number of winnings to the variable winning opening 234 in the previous round is supplemented by one, the cumulative shortage is reduced by one. For example, since the first sub-control unit 400 supplements the surplus cumulative number by 1 to the insufficient cumulative number, the first sub-control unit 400 reduces and decreases the insufficient cumulative number included in the insufficient cumulative number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 by one. The deficient accumulated number information including the later deficient accumulated number is stored again in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the process proceeds to step S1213.

  In step S1213 following step S1211, only one shortage of the number of winnings to the variable winning opening 234 in the previous round is replenished, so that the number of winnings is increased by one. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 increases the winning number included in the winning number information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 by 1, and stores the winning number information including the increased winning number in the RAM 408. It memorize | stores in an area | region again and transfers to step S1203.

  The processing of steps S1203 to S1213 is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step S1203 that the number of winning prizes is not less than 10 and until it is determined in step S1207 that the surplus cumulative number is zero.

  On the other hand, in step S1215 subsequent to step S1207, since the shortage of the number of winnings to the variable winning opening 234 in the previous round cannot be replenished, the shortage cumulative number indicating the number of winnings of the game balls in all rounds is obtained. Add the deficiency. For example, when the surplus cumulative number is 0 and the shortage of the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 cannot be replenished, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234. In order to be able to replenish the shortage of the number of winning game balls to the variable prize opening 234 when the predetermined number is exceeded, the shortage accumulation stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is provided so as to be replenished when receiving the variable prize opening prize command. The shortage is added to the shortage cumulative number included in the number information, and the process proceeds to step S1221.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 is 10 or more in the previous round, is the surplus number indicating the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number greater than zero? It is determined whether or not (step S1217). For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the surplus number information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and determines that the surplus number included in the surplus number information is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S1219, and the surplus number information is stored. If it is determined that the number is not greater than 0, that is, the surplus number is 0, the process proceeds to step S1221.

  In step S1219 following step S1217, a notification effect command based on the surplus number information and the closing condition flag is output. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a notification effect command to the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 and the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 with reference to FIG. The process proceeds to S1221. Thus, a predetermined notification for notifying that the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10) (hereinafter, the predetermined notification may be referred to as “predetermined notification effect”). (Described later) is executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to change a predetermined notification effect that is executed based on the value of the surplus number included in the surplus number information, but the same predetermined notification that is the same number of times as the value of the surplus number. The effect may be configured to be repeatedly executed.

  In step S1221 subsequent to step S1215, step S1217, or step S1219, the winning number information managed for each round is cleared. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the value of the winning number included in the winning number information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 to “0” in order to clear the winning number information in the previous round. Then, the process proceeds to step S1223.

  In step S1223 following step S1221, the surplus number information managed for each round is cleared. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the value of the surplus number included in the surplus number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 to “0” in order to clear the surplus number information in the previous round. The process proceeds to step S1225.

  In step S1225 subsequent to step S1223, a closing condition flag (details will be described later) is set to an off state. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 stores “0” as the value of the closing condition flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 in order to reset the closing condition of the previous round, The first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process is terminated. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be configured to execute the same processing as the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation processing at the time of receiving the round designation command at the end of 16 rounds of the big hit game.

  Next, the special figure EF winning notification process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special figure EF winning notification process (step S1205) in the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process when the round designation command shown in FIG. 14 is received.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the special figure EF winning notification process, a notification effect command is output (step S1301). For example, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a notification effect command to the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120, and ends the special figure EF winning notification process. Thus, a predetermined notification effect (described later) for notifying that a game ball has been won in the variable winning opening 234 is executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the game balls to win the variable winning opening 234 in the big hits of the special figure E and the special figure F. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute a predetermined notification effect based only on the winning of the game ball in the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game in the special figure E or the special figure F. ing.

  Next, the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process when the jackpot end command is received by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process when a jackpot end command is received. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the RAM 408 and the like by the CPU 404, and executes the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process when the jackpot end command is received. .

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit end command, it is first determined whether or not the surplus cumulative number is larger than 0 (step S1401). For example, if the first sub control unit 400 reads the surplus cumulative number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and determines that the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S1403. If it is determined that the surplus cumulative number is not greater than 0, that is, the surplus cumulative number is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1405 without executing step S1403.

  In step S1403 following step S1401, a notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information is output. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to display in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 the number of winning balls including the surplus cumulative number acquired during the big hit game. The notification effect command is output to the control board that performs, and the process proceeds to step S1405.

  In step S1405 subsequent to step S1401 or step S1403, prize ball acquisition information is stored. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the prize ball acquisition information including the prize ball acquisition number in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 in order to store the total prize ball acquisition number in the jackpot game, step S1407. Migrate to

  In step S1407 following step S1405, the surplus cumulative number information is cleared. For example, the first sub control unit 400 sets the value of the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 to “0”, and proceeds to step S1409. As a result, the cumulative number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 234 over a predetermined number (for example, 10 for each round and 160 for 16R big hit) in one big hit game is 0. Reset to.

  In step S1409 following step S1407, the winning number information is cleared. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the value of the winning number included in the winning number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 to “0”, and proceeds to step S1411. As a result, the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 234 in one big hit game is reset to zero.

  In step S1411 following step S1409, the surplus number information is cleared. For example, the first sub control unit 400 sets the value of the surplus number included in the surplus number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 to “0”, and proceeds to step S1413. As a result, the number of game balls won in the variable prize opening 234 exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10) in the final round is reset to zero.

  In step S1413 subsequent to step S1411, the deficient cumulative number information is cleared. For example, the first sub control unit 400 sets the value of the shortage cumulative number included in the shortage cumulative number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 to “0”. As a result, the number of game balls deficient with respect to a predetermined number that can be won in the variable winning opening 234 in one big hit game (for example, 10 pieces per round and 160 pieces in case of 16R big hit) is insufficient. Reset to zero. If the process of step S1413 is executed, the first sub control unit 400 ends the first sub control unit award ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit end command.

  Next, the first sub-control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the variable winning port closing command of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of a flow of first sub-control unit flag setting processing when a variable winning opening closing command is received. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the RAM 408 and the like by the CPU 404 and executes the first sub-control unit flag setting process when the variable winning opening closing command is received.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the first sub-control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening closing command, first, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is the detection of winning of 10 game balls. Determination is made (step S1501). For example, the first sub-control unit 400 includes information indicating that the closing condition has detected the winning of 10 game balls to the variable winning port 234 in the variable winning port closing command transmitted from the main control unit 300. If it is determined that the closing condition is that a winning of 10 game balls has been detected, the process proceeds to step S1503, and the closing condition is determined to have elapsed for the variable winning opening closing command. If it is determined that the information indicating is included, it is determined that the closing condition is that the winning of 10 game balls has not been detected, and the first at the time of receiving the variable winning port closing command without executing the process of step S1503. The sub-control unit flag setting process is terminated.

  In step S1503 following step S1501, the closing condition flag is set to an on state. The closing condition flag is set to an on state when the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is that a winning of 10 game balls has been detected, and is set to an off state when the predetermined closing condition has elapsed. Is set. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 stores, for example, “1” as a value of the flag in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 in order to set the closing condition flag to the on state. When the first sub-control unit 400 sets the closing condition flag to the on state, the first sub-control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the variable winning port closing command is terminated.

  Next, the notification effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. 18 shows a notification effect list table in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The notification effect list table shown in FIG. 18 is stored in the ROM 406, for example. From the left, the table shows “special drawing type” in the first column, “conditions for shifting to the variable winning opening closed state” in the second column, and “closed state transition” in the third column. The number of “winning prizes after”, “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” in the fourth column, and “predetermined notification effect” in the fifth column. The “type of special figure” in the first column shown in FIG. 18 indicates a symbol that is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 after the special figure variable game ends. “Condition when shifting to variable winning opening closing state (variable winning opening closing condition)” in the second column indicates the closing condition of variable winning opening 234. The variable winning opening 234 shifts to a closed state when either a predetermined time has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls has been won. The “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” in the third column indicates the number of winning game balls after the variable winning port 234 has shifted to the closed state and during the effective period. The “number of winnings exceeding a predetermined number” in the fourth column indicates the number of game balls that have won exceeding the predetermined number within one round and the effective period thereafter. The “predetermined notification effect” in the fifth column indicates the type of notification effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. In FIG. 18, when the “predetermined notification effect” field is “no effect”, this indicates that the predetermined notification effect is not executed.

  In FIG. 18, “special drawing A / D” in the column of “special drawing type” indicates that the special drawing is special drawing A or special drawing D. Similarly, “Special figure B / C” in the “Special figure type” column indicates that the special figure is Special figure B or Special figure C, and “Special figure EF” in the “Special figure type” column. ”Indicates that the special figure is special figure E or special figure F, and“ special figure G / H ”in the“ special figure type ”column indicates that the special figure is special figure G or special figure H, respectively. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A / D”, the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “the predetermined time (25 s) has elapsed”, and “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state”. Is “1” and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0”, the “predetermined notification effect” is “no effect”. “Special figure type” is “Special figure A / D”, “Variable winning opening closing condition” is “Elapsed time (25 s)”, and “Number of winnings after transition to closed state” is “2”. When “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0”, “the predetermined notification effect” is “no effect”, and when “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”. The “predetermined notification effect” is “effect B”. “Special figure type” is “Special figure A / D”, “Variable winning opening closing condition” is “Elapsed time (25 s)”, and “Number of winnings after transition to closed state” is “3” When “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0”, “the predetermined notification effect” is “effect A”, and when “the winning number exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”. The “predetermined notification effect” is “effect B”, and the “predetermined notification effect” is “effect C” when the “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2”. “Special figure type” is “Special figure A / D”, “Variable winning opening closing condition” is “Elapsed time (25 s)”, and “Number of winnings after transition to closed state” is “4” When “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0”, “the predetermined notification effect” is “effect A”, and when “the winning number exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”. The “predetermined notification effect” is “effect B”, and the “predetermined notification effect” is “effect C” when the “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2”. When the “number of winnings” is “3 or more”, the “predetermined notification effect” is “effect X (specific)”.

  “Special figure type” is “Special figure A / D”, “Variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10)”, and “Number of winnings after transition to closed state” is “1” When “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”, the “predetermined notification effect” is “effect C”, and the “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “2”. When the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number is “2”, the “predetermining notification effect” is “effect D”, and the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state is “3 or more”, which exceeds the predetermined number. When the “winning number” is “3 or more”, the “predetermined notification effect” is “effect Y (specific)”.

  When the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A / D”, the threshold value is set to “3”. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute a specific notification effect as a “predetermined notification effect” when the value of “the number of winnings exceeding a predetermined number” is equal to or greater than a threshold value. . For example, when the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “elapse of a predetermined time (25 s)” and the “number of winnings exceeding a predetermined number” is “3 or more”, a special notification as a “predetermined notification effect” The “production X (specific)” which is the production is executed. In addition, when the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10) winnings” and the “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “3 or more”, a special “notification effect” is provided. A “production Y (specific)” which is a simple notification production is executed.

  For example, during a big hit game with special figure A or special figure D, six game balls have been won at variable winning opening 234 when a predetermined time of one round (for example, 25 s) has elapsed, and within the subsequent effective period If four game balls are awarded to the variable winning opening 234, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A / D” and the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “the predetermined time (25 s) has elapsed”. Since “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “4”, the number of winnings in one round and the valid period is 10 (= 6 + 4), and the number of winnings is equal to the predetermined number. Is not exceeded. Therefore, the “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” becomes “0”, and “effect A” is selected as the “predetermined notification effect”. Also, for example, during a big hit game with special figure A or special figure D, seven game balls have been won at variable winning opening 234 when a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) of one round has passed, If four game balls win the variable prize opening 234 within the period, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A / D” and the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “the predetermined time (25 s) has elapsed”. Since “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “4”, the number of winnings in one round and the valid period is 11 (= 7 + 4), and the number of winnings exceeds the predetermined number by 1. . For this reason, “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”, and “effect B” is selected as the “predetermined notification effect”. In addition, for example, during a big hit game with special figure A or special figure D, eight game balls have won at variable winning opening 234 when a predetermined time of one round (for example, 25 s) has passed, If four game balls win the variable prize opening 234 within the period, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A / D” and the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “the predetermined time (25 s) has elapsed”. Since “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “4”, the number of winnings in one round and the effective period is 12 (= 8 + 4), and the number of winnings exceeds the predetermined number by 2. . Therefore, the “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2”, and “effect C” is selected as the “predetermined notification effect”. In addition, for example, during a big hit game with special figure A or special figure D, nine game balls have been won at variable winning opening 234 when a predetermined time of one round (for example, 25 s) has passed, If four game balls win the variable prize opening 234 within the period, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A / D” and the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “the predetermined time (25 s) has elapsed”. Since “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “4”, the number of winnings in one round and the effective period is 13 (= 9 + 4), and the number of winnings exceeds the predetermined number by 3. . For this reason, the “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “3 or more” and is equal to or more than the threshold value, and “effect X (specific)” is selected as the “predetermined notification effect”.

  For example, during a big hit game with special figure A or special figure D, 10 game balls are won in the variable prize opening 234 within a predetermined time of one round (for example, 25 s), and 1 within the effective period thereafter. When a single game ball wins the variable winning opening 234, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing AD”, and the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10) winning”. Since “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “1”, the number of winnings in one round and the valid period is 11 (= 10 + 1), and the number of winnings exceeds the predetermined number by one. Therefore, “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”, and “effect C” is selected as the “predetermined notification effect”. Also, for example, during a big hit game with special figure A or special figure D, 10 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234 within a predetermined time of one round (for example, 25 s), and within the effective period thereafter. When two game balls win the variable winning opening 234, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing AD”, and the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10) winning”. In addition, since “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “2”, the number of winnings in one round and the valid period is 12 (= 10 + 2), and the number of winnings exceeds the predetermined number by 2. For this reason, “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2”, and “effect D” is selected as the “predetermined notification effect”. Also, for example, during a big hit game with special figure A or special figure D, 10 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234 within a predetermined time of one round (for example, 25 s), and within the effective period thereafter. When three game balls win the variable winning opening 234, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing AD”, and the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10) winning”. In addition, since the “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “3”, the number of winnings in one round and the valid period is 13 (= 10 + 3), and the number of winnings exceeds the predetermined number by 3. For this reason, “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “3 or more”, which is equal to or greater than the threshold value, and “effect Y (specific)” is selected as the “predetermined notification effect”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, “special drawing type” is “special drawing B / C”, “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined time (1 s) has passed”, and “after closed state transition” When the “number of winnings” is “1” and the “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0”, the “predetermined notification effect” is “effect A”. “Special figure type” is “Special figure B / C”, “Variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined time (1 s) elapsed”, and “Number of winnings after transition to closed state” is “2 or more” When “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”, “the predetermined notification effect” is “effect F”, and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2 or more”. In some cases, the “predetermined notification effect” is “effect Z (probability change notification effect)”. “Special figure type” is “Special figure B / C”, “Variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10)”, and “Number of winnings after transition to closed state” is “0” If “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0 or more”, the “predetermined notification effect” is “effect V (special)”. The jackpot game based on “Special Figure B” or “Special Figure C” has a relatively short opening period of one round of the variable winning opening 234, which is relatively short as 2 s. Therefore, 10 game balls are won within this short opening period. In the case of shifting to the closed state, the pachinko machine 100 is configured to execute a special effect V different from the normal effect as a privilege for winning a lot of game balls.

  When the “special drawing type” is “special drawing B / C”, the threshold value is set to “2”. For example, when the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “elapsed predetermined time (25 s)” and the “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2 or more”, a special notification is given as “predetermined notification effect”. The production “production Z (probability change notification production)” is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing EF”, the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined time (0.4 s) elapsed”, and the “closed state” When “the number of winnings after the transition” is “1 or more” and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0 or more”, “the predetermined notification effect” is “effect Z (probability notification effect)” It becomes. “Special figure type” is “Special figure EF”, “Variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10)”, and “Number of winnings after transition to closed state” is “0” If “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0 or more”, the “predetermined notification effect” becomes the “error notification effect”. After the big hit game based on “Special Figure F”, the gaming state does not shift to the special figure certain change state. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 has a predetermined value even if a game ball wins the variable winning opening 234 within the effective period after the condition of “predetermined time (0.4 s) has passed” in the big hit game of “Special Figure F”. The notification effect is not executed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform a predetermined lottery during the big hit game based on “special drawing E”, and to execute “effect Z” as a probability change notification effect if the lottery is won. May be. The pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration may make it possible for the player to have an expectation that the gaming state will shift to the special figure probability changing state. The jackpot game based on "Special Figure E" or "Special Figure F" has a very short opening period of one round of the variable winning opening 234 of 0.4 s, and 10 game balls win in this short opening period. The probability is very close to zero. For this reason, when the closing condition during the big hit game is “predetermined number (10) winnings”, it is possible that either a malfunction has occurred in the variable winning opening 234 or an illegal act has been performed. The pachinko machine 100 is configured to execute the error notification effect regardless of the conditions of “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” or “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number”.

  When “special drawing type” is “special drawing EF”, the threshold value is set to “0”. For example, “special drawing type” is “special drawing E”, “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined time (25 s) elapsed”, and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0 or more”. In this case, a “notification Z (probability change notification effect)” that is a special notification effect is executed as the “predetermined notification effect”. In addition, when the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10) winnings” and the “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0 or more”, a special “notification effect” is provided. An “error notification effect”, which is a simple notification effect, is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, “special drawing type” is “special drawing GH”, “variable winning opening closing condition” is “elapsed time (0.39 s)”, and “closed state” When “the number of winnings after the transition” is “0 or more” and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0 or more”, the “predetermined notification effect” is “no effect”. “Special figure type” is “Special figure GH”, “Variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10 pieces)”, and “Number of winnings after transition to closed state” is “0” If “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0 or more”, the “predetermined notification effect” is the “error notification effect”. The small hit game based on “Special Figure G” or “Special Figure H” has a very short opening period of the variable winning opening 234 of 0.39 s, and the probability that 10 game balls will win in this short opening period is extremely high. Near zero. For this reason, when the closing condition in the small hit game is “predetermined number (10) winnings”, either a malfunction has occurred in the variable winning opening 234 or an illegal act has been performed. Since the possibility is high, the pachinko machine 100 is configured to execute the error notification effect regardless of the conditions of “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” or “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number”.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a predetermined notification effect in the case of “special drawing E” or “special drawing F”, and the small hit game of “special drawing G” or “special drawing H”. In this case, since the predetermined notification effect other than the error notification cannot be executed, the predetermined time when the game ball is won at the variable winning port 234 during the game where the opening period of the variable winning port 234 is very short is predetermined. When the notification effect is executed, the winning game is based on “special drawing E” called sudden probability change. In this case, a predetermined notification effect can be used as a latent notification for notifying a sudden probability change latency. During the big hit game based on “Special Figure E” or “Special Figure F”, the opening time of the variable winning opening 234 is relatively short, but a game ball wins the variable winning opening 234 and a predetermined notification effect is executed. The jackpot game is a jackpot of “Special Figure E”, and after the jackpot game is over, the gaming state shifts to a special figure high probability state. For this reason, the player wins the game ball to the variable winning opening 234 during the two round big hit game in which the opening time of the variable winning opening 234 is relatively short, and ends the big winning game depending on whether or not a predetermined notification effect is executed. Since it is attempted to confirm whether or not the gaming state will shift to the special figure high probability state later, there is a case where the gaming ball can be launched into the gaming area 124 during the two round big hit game.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a game ball is difficult to win in the variable winning opening 234 during a big hit game based on the “special drawing E” or the “special drawing F”. Therefore, the normal number of game balls to be awarded to the variable winning opening 234 of the big hit game based on the “special drawing E” or “special drawing F” is set to 0, and one or more gaming balls have won the variable winning opening 234. In this case, a predetermined notification effect is executed. The predetermined number may be 0, and the predetermined number and the threshold may be the same value.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a winning means (for example, a variable winning port 234), and starts after the open state is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 25s, 1s). When a game ball wins the winning means during the closed state, a predetermined notification (for example, a notification effect shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 described later) can be executed. For example, in the pachinko machine 100, the predetermined winning means (for example, the variable winning port 234) continues the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 25s, 1s), and the closing condition is satisfied (for example, the predetermined number (10)). A predetermined notification effect (for example, the notification effect shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 to be described later) based on the fact that the game ball has won the predetermined winning means during the closed state that is started after the winning, elapse of a predetermined time). ) Can be executed, for example, a speaker 120 and a decorative symbol display device 208 are provided.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the player may be interested in winning a game ball while the predetermined winning means is closed. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the player's dissatisfaction with respect to the fact that a prescribed number (predetermined number, for example, 10) of game balls has not won may be solved by a predetermined notification effect. .

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing a predetermined notification when a predetermined condition related to the number of winning game balls (for example, winning in the variable winning opening 234 after shifting to the closed state) is achieved. . For example, in the pachinko machine 100, the notification effect execution means performs a predetermined notification effect based on the achievement of a predetermined condition related to the number of winning game balls (for example, winning in the variable winning opening 234 after shifting to the closed state). It is configured to be executable. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute a predetermined notification effect when the number of winning game balls to a predetermined winning means is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  For example, when a predetermined winning means shifts from an open state to a closed state after elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 25 s, 1 s), a prescribed number (predetermined number, for example, 10) of game balls have not won However, there is a case where a predetermined number (predetermined number, for example, 10) is reached by winning a game ball after that. According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, by performing a predetermined notification effect in such a case, it is possible to notify that a predetermined number of game balls have won, so that the dissatisfaction of the player may be reduced. . Further, the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration can improve the interest of the game because a predetermined notification effect can be executed even when the number of winning game balls exceeds a predetermined number (predetermined number, for example, 10). May be possible. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration has a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) in the variable prize opening 234 as well as a case where a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) of game balls are won in the variable prize opening 234. Even if there is only a winning game ball that does not satisfy (), a predetermined notification effect is executed when the gaming ball wins after the closing condition of the variable winning slot 234 is established. That is, the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration can execute a predetermined notification effect even if there is no over winning, so that the player's dissatisfaction is alleviated or an illusion occurs when the player has over winning. There are cases where it can be allowed to.

  The winning means is changed from the open state to the closed state even when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins, and the pachinko machine 100 is in a closed state that is started after the open state is continued for a predetermined time. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the winning means, a predetermined notification can be executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is controlled when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls has been won and a predetermined time (for example, 25 s, 1 s) has passed in a predetermined winning means. The state transition means is configured to control the predetermined winning means from the open state to the closed state, and the notification effect executing means has a game exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 110) in the predetermined winning means during the closed state. A predetermined notification effect can be executed based on the winning of the ball.

  The pachinko machine 100 having this configuration can execute a predetermined notification effect when the number of winning game balls to a predetermined winning means exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10). May be able to improve the interest of the elderly.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment restricts execution of the predetermined notification effect when the number of winning game balls to a predetermined winning means does not exceed a predetermined number (for example, 10) (for example, FIG. 18). “No effect” in the “predetermined notification effect” in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a predetermined function when a game ball wins the winning means in a closed state that starts after a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the winning means. Notification can be executed. For example, in the pachinko machine 100, the notification effect executing means performs the predetermined winning during the predetermined winning means closed state which is started after a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have won the predetermined winning means. A predetermined notification effect can be executed based on the winning of the game ball in the means (for example, when the “variable winning opening closing condition” in FIG. 18 is “predetermined number (10) winnings”) “Production C” can be executed as “Production”).

  The pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration can execute a predetermined notification effect when the number of winning game balls to a predetermined winning means exceeds a predetermined number, thereby improving the interest of the player. There are cases where it is possible.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can be executed with different contents of the predetermined notification depending on the number of game balls won in excess of a predetermined number (for example, 10). For example, in the pachinko machine 100, the notification effect execution means changes the predetermined notification effect according to the number of game balls won in excess of a predetermined number (for example, 10) (for example, “variable winning opening closing in FIG. 18). When “condition” is “predetermined number (10) of winnings”, the effect selected as “predetermined notification effect” differs according to “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number”).

  The pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration can vary the predetermined notification effect according to the number of game balls won in excess of the predetermined number, so it can be determined how many game balls have won the predetermined number. It may be easy for the player to recognize.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the same predetermined notification effect regardless of the number of game balls won by the notification effect execution means exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10). Yes. For example, in the pachinko machine 100, the “special drawing type” in FIG. 18 is “special drawing A / D”, and the “predetermined number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2” or “1”. “Creation C” is selected as the “notification effect”.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is in a closed state that is started after a predetermined number of game balls are won in the winning means even if the number of game balls won in the winning means exceeds the predetermined number A predetermined number when the number of game balls won is different from the number of game balls won in a closed state that is started after the winning means continues for a predetermined time (for example, 25 s, 1 s). It can be executed with different contents of the notification. For example, in the pachinko machine 100, even if the number of game balls won in the winning means exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10), the notification effect executing means sends the predetermined number of game balls to the winning means. When the game ball wins during the closed state that starts after winning a prize, and when the game ball is in the closed state that starts after the winning means continues the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 25 s, 1 s) It is comprised so that the alerting | reporting aspect of a predetermined alerting | reporting effect can be varied with the case where it wins.

  For example, the “special drawing type” in FIG. 18 is “special drawing AD”, the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined time (25 s)”, and the “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “ When “3” is set and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”, “Preparation B” is executed as “predetermined notification”, and “special drawing type” is “special drawing AD”. The “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10) winnings”, the “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “1”, and the “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”. If it is, “Presentation C” different from “Production B” is executed as “predetermined notification”.

  The pachinko machine 100 having this configuration is controlled to be closed by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls by changing the notification mode of a predetermined notification effect, or for a predetermined time (for example, , 25 s), the player may be able to recognize whether or not the closed state has been controlled. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration has a predetermined notification based on any one of the triggers when the predetermined winning means shifts to the closed state and a difference is provided in the notification mode of the predetermined notification effect. In some cases, the notification effect can be emphasized. For example, if the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration emphasizes a notification effect when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins and a predetermined winning means shifts to a closed state, 1 of the big hit game When it is possible to digest the rounds relatively quickly, and to give the player a sense of satisfaction with the prize ball that the game ball has won a predetermined number (for example, 10), that is, so-called over prize. There is. Further, the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration has a predetermined number (for example, 10) if the notification effect when the predetermined winning means shifts to the closed state after a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) has been emphasized. In some cases, the player can be satisfied by a notification effect informing that the game ball has been won without any shortage.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing a predetermined notification when a game ball wins a winning means within an effective period set until the winning means is again opened. Yes. For example, in the pachinko machine 100, the notification effect executing means wins a game ball in the predetermined winning means within a valid period set until the predetermined winning means in the closed state is again opened. Based on this, it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined notification effect.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be easy to understand whether or not it is a winning game ball in the next round by setting an effective period.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a predetermined notification only once in accordance with the number of game balls won in excess of a predetermined number (for example, 10) after the effective period. For example, in the pachinko machine 100, the notification effect executing means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined notification effect only once according to the number of game balls won in excess of a predetermined number (for example, 10) after the effective period. ing. For example, the pachinko machine 100 performs “predetermined notification effect” in accordance with step S1219 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” shown in FIG. "Is selected so that only one type of performance is selected.

  For example, if a predetermined notification effect is performed for each game ball won in excess of a predetermined number (for example, 10), the notification effects overlap with each other and the notification effect cannot be easily communicated to the player. There is a case. In such a case, according to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, at the end of the effective period, the number of winning game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10) is collectively counted and a predetermined notification effect is given once. By executing all of them together, it may be possible to convey the notification effect to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration changes the predetermined notification effect depending on the number of winning game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, ten), the pachinko machine 100 conveys the notification effect to the player more easily. There are cases where it is possible.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing a specific notification as a predetermined notification when the number of game balls won in excess of a predetermined number is equal to or greater than a threshold value. For example, in the pachinko machine 100, the notification effect execution means has a threshold value (for example, as shown in FIG. The threshold is “3”, the threshold is “2” for “special drawing B / C”, and the threshold is “0” for “special drawing E / F”. A specific notification effect can be executed as the notification effect (for example, “effect X (specific)”, “effect Y (specific)”, “effect Z (probability change notification effect)”, “error notification effect shown in FIGS. 18 and 19). )).

  There is a limit to the effective period, and if a game ball that is clearly excessively longer than the game ball launch interval wins after the predetermined winning means has been closed, illegal acts such as so-called magnet goto (grape goto) are performed. On the other hand, it can be assumed that it could happen accidentally. In such a case, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a premium notification that uses a predetermined notification effect for a notification effect that notifies an error or that a rare event occurs is used. It may be used for notification effects.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a predetermined notification effect that differs depending on only the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 234 (for example, 10), that is, the number of over winnings. It may be configured. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be configured to execute different predetermined notification effects depending on both the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 and the number of over winning prizes. In this case, the content of the predetermined notification effect may be completely different, or the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established after a predetermined time (for example, 25 s), and the number of game balls won after that is one. And a case where the number of game balls won afterwards is two, a predetermined notification effect may be executed in which part of the content of the effect is the same.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be configured to execute different predetermined notification effects depending on the number of game balls that have won over prizes. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs a predetermined notification effect to be executed even when the number of game balls won after the closing condition is established is the same when the type of the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is different. It may be different. According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, when the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls, the player can be further given a sense of excitement, or variable When the closing condition of the winning opening 234 is a predetermined time (for example, 25 seconds), a player may be given a satisfaction that a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more has been won.

  Next, a list of notification effects on the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19 shows a state where a predetermined notification effect is being executed. In FIG. 19A to FIG. 19B, a decorative symbol display device 208 is schematically shown at the center, and a speaker 120 is schematically shown on the left side thereof.

  FIG. 19A shows a state in which a predetermined notification effect “effect A” is being executed. In “effect A”, an image representing “panda” and a character image “Wow!” Are displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and no sound is emitted from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 19B shows a state in which a predetermined notification effect “effect B” is being executed. In “Production B”, an image representing “Sister of Princess” and a character image “Bonus!” Are displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a voice “Kean” is emitted from the speaker 120. It is done.

  FIG. 19C shows a state in which a predetermined notification effect “effect C” is being executed. In “Production C”, an image representing “Go station” and a character image “Too much!” Are displayed in the production display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a sound “Jakin” is heard from the speaker 120. Be emitted.

  FIG. 19D shows a state in which a predetermined notification effect “effect D” is being executed. In “Production D”, an image representing “Princess” and a character image “Large Prize!” Are displayed in the production display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a sound “Kein Keen Keen” is output from the speaker 120. Be emitted.

  FIG. 19 (e) shows a state in which a predetermined notification effect “effect F” is being executed. In “Production F”, an image representing “Princess” and a character image “Well put!” Are displayed in the production display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “Queen” is displayed from the speaker 120. A voice is emitted.

  FIG. 19 (f) shows a state in which a predetermined notification effect “effect X” is being executed. In “effect X”, an image representing “Yoshimune” and a character image “Ohban behavior !!!” are displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a voice “appare is” from the speaker 120. Be emitted.

  FIG. 19G shows a state in which a predetermined notification effect “effect Y” is being executed. In “Production Y”, an image representing “Sabohani (a character with a cactus and a haniwa motif)” and a character image “Legendary winning !!” are displayed in the production display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. A speech “congratulations” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 19H shows a state in which a predetermined notification effect “effect Z” for notifying the special figure probability variation is being executed. In “Production Z”, an image representing “Princess” and a character image “Probably confirm!” Are displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a sound “Probability” is emitted from the speaker 120. It is done.

  FIG. 19 (i) shows a state where a predetermined notification effect of “effect V” is being executed. In “Production V”, an image representing “Yoshimune” and a character image “Full”! Be emitted.

  FIG. 19J shows a state where the “error notification effect” is being executed. In the “error notification effect”, an image representing “evil merchant Echigoya” and a character image “evil noo” are displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “Error” is displayed from the speaker 120. “Check the platform” is repeated repeatedly a predetermined number of times.

  Next, the special figure variation game of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 20 to FIG. 25, a special figure variable game will be described in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 20 to FIG. 25 are diagrams for explaining special figure variable games in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the predetermined number of winning balls obtained based on the winning of a predetermined number of game balls to the variable winning opening 234 is notified at the end of one round, and the predetermined number of winning balls is based on the winning of game balls within the effective period. An example will be described in which the number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls obtained by adding the number of winning balls and the predetermined number of winning balls are notified after the end of the big hit game. FIG. 20A to FIG. 25 show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  In FIG. 20A, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure variable game is won as the 16R special big hit (probable big hit). It has been reported. Although not shown, “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212.

  A special figure 1 holding display area 208d1 is provided on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 informs the player of the number of special figure 1 random value pairs stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area as the special figure 1 hold number (the special figure 1 start information hold number). It is possible. The special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 is one special figure 1 for one special figure 1 random value set among a plurality of special figure 1 random value sets stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area. It is configured to be able to notify the number of the special figure 1 hold by performing the hold display of the variable game. Since only one special figure 1 variable game is held at the time shown in FIG. 20 (a), a special display corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game held first is displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1. The image a1 is displayed, and it is notified that one special figure 1 variable game is put on hold.

  Further, on the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, a special figure 2 hold display area 208d2 for displaying a hold related to the special figure 2 variable game is provided. Since the special figure hold display area 208d2 has the same function and function as the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 except that the special figure 2 variable game hold is displayed, detailed description is omitted. At the time shown in FIG. 20 (a), since the special figure 2 variable game is not held, the hold display image is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  Prior to the start of the jackpot game started after the end of the notification effect indicating that the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 20A is a jackpot, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot start command shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the special figure A to special figure F flag values stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, respectively, and the special figure A flag value is “1” and the jackpot game. Is determined to be a big hit game of “special drawing A” (Yes in step S1001), and a winning ball acquisition information command is transmitted to a control board (not shown) that controls the decorative symbol display device 208 (step S1003). The first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit start command is terminated. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the values of the special figure A flag to the special figure J flag included in the symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 at the start of the special symbol variable game in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. It comes to memorize.

  When the above processing is completed, a character image indicating the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed in a winning ball winning number display area 800 provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time shown in FIG. 20 (a), for example, it is the first hit of the pachinko machine 100, and the accumulated number of awarded winning balls is 0, so that the number of accumulated winning balls is displayed in the awarded ball earned number display area 800. A character image “0GET” is displayed. In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the player that the jackpot game has started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 20B, a character image “Big hit!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Prior to the start of the first round in the jackpot game shown in FIG. 20B, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure A flag is on and the jackpot game is a jackpot game of “Special Figure A” (Yes in step S1201), and the jackpot game is the first hit. Since there is no predetermined number of 10 game balls in the variable winning slot 234 in the previous round, it is determined that the number of winning balls is “0” and smaller than 10 (Yes in step S1203), and the surplus accumulation It is determined that the number is “0” and the surplus cumulative number is not larger than 0 (No in step S1207). Since there is no shortage of the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 at present, the shortage cumulative number is 0. Is added (step S1215), the winning number information is cleared (step S1221), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1223), and the closing condition flag is set to the OFF state (step S1221). S1225), and ends the first sub-control unit award balls acquired information generation process when receiving round specified command.

  When the above processing is completed, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 in order to notify the player how many rounds are concerned. As a result, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the round is the first round in the round display area 810 provided in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 and below the winning ball acquisition number display area 800. A character image of “1R” indicating that is displayed.

  Next, based on the fact that one game ball is won in the variable winning opening 234 and the game ball detecting means detects the winning, the main control unit 300 transmits a variable winning opening winning command to the first sub-control unit 400. To do. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the variable winning award winning command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning award winning command shown in FIG. . For example, when the variable winning opening winning command is based on detecting the winning of the first game ball in the first round of the jackpot game, the number of winnings included in the winning number information stored in the RAM 408 Is “0”, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the number of winnings is smaller than 10 (Yes in step S1101), increases the number of winnings by 1, and stores “1” as the value of the winning number (step) S1103), a prize ball acquisition information command is transmitted to a control board (not shown) for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable prize opening prize command is terminated. .

  When the above processing is completed, although not shown, a character image for notifying the number of winning balls is displayed in the winning ball number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when one game ball is won in the variable winning opening 234, the number of prize balls is set to fifteen. For this reason, a character image “15 GET” for notifying the number of winning balls based on the winning of the first game ball to the variable winning opening 234 in the round of the jackpot game is displayed in the winning ball number display area 800. Is done.

  Thereafter, when the game ball detecting means detects the winning of the second to tenth game balls within a predetermined number (for example, 10) to the variable winning opening 234 in the first round, the main control unit 300 receives the winning. A variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 every time. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes steps S1101, S1103, and S1115 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command.

  As a result, although not shown in the drawing, the winning ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the winning winning sphere 234 in one round for each winning of the second to tenth game balls. A character image representing the number of winning balls based on the winning is displayed.

  In this example, for example, in the first round, when 10 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234 before the open state of the variable winning opening 234 elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 25 s), the 10 gaming balls The closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established based on the winning. When the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the variable winning port closing command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the variable winning port closing command shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is winning of 10 game balls to the variable winning opening 234 (Yes in step S1501), and sets the closing condition flag to the on state. (Step S1503), the first sub-control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening closing command is ended.

  In the present embodiment, for example, 11 pieces to the variable winning opening 234 in the first round are in a closed state that is started after the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 in the first round is satisfied and within the effective period. One game ball that wins the eye wins. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a variable winning opening winning command based on the detection of the winning of the eleventh game ball to the variable winning opening 234, the first sub control unit 400 receives the first at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command shown in FIG. The sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process is executed. For example, if the variable winning opening winning command is based on detecting the eleventh winning in the first round of the jackpot game, the first sub-control unit 400 is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. It is determined that the number of winnings included in the winning number information is “10” and not smaller than 10 (No in step S1101), and the surplus number is increased by 1 to set the surplus number to “1” as a predetermined value in the RAM 408. It is stored in the storage area (step S1105), and it is determined that the shortage cumulative number is not larger than 0 because the number of winning game balls to the variable prize opening 234 is not short at present and the shortage cumulative number is “0”. (No in step S1107), the surplus cumulative number is increased by 1, and “1” is stored as the value of the surplus cumulative number (step S1113). 1 terminates the sub-control section award balls acquired information generation process.

  As described above, even if there are more than a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls in the variable winning opening 234 in one round, the first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the surplus number and stores the predetermined number in the RAM 408. The control for notifying the winning immediately after the winning is performed only by storing in the area.

  Prior to the start of the second round of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 20 (c), which is started after the passage of the interval time (for example, 2.5 s) from the transition to the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 in the first round. For example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process upon reception of the round designation command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure A flag is on and the big hit game is a special hit game of “Special figure A” (Yes in step S1201), and the variable winning a prize in the first round Since there are a total of 11 game balls won in 234 exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10), the number of winnings included in the winning number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “10”. Is not smaller than 10 (No in step S1203), and the surplus number is determined to be “1” and larger than 0 (Yes in step S1217). Next, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the process of step S1219, refers to the notification effect list table shown in FIG. 18, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A”, and the “variable winning opening closing” “Condition” is “predetermined number (10) winnings”, “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “1”, and “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”. “Presentation effect” is selected as “predetermined notification effect”, and the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 are set to the predetermined notification effect based on the surplus number information and the closing condition flag. A notification effect command for executing “effect C” is output (step S1219), the winning number information is cleared (step S1221), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1223), and the closing condition flag is turned off. Set state (step S1225), and ends the first sub-control unit award balls acquired information generation process upon reception round specified command.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 20C, an “effect C” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, and an image representing “the station” is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. And a character image “Too much!” Is displayed, and a sound “Jakeen” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured not to notify the number of winning balls based on the gaming balls won in the variable winning opening 234 in the previous round at the start of the round exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10). ing. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbol display device via the control board in order to notify only the number of winning balls based on winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234. 208 is controlled. As a result, as shown in FIG. 20C, a character image “150 GET” indicating that the number of winning balls is 150 is displayed in the winning ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board in order to notify the player of how many rounds are concerned. As a result, as shown in FIG. 20C, a character image “2R” indicating that the round is the second round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After the second round of the jackpot game is started, for example, the following processing is executed based on the fact that one game ball has won the variable winning opening 234. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the variable winning award winning command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning award winning command. The winning number information is cleared and the winning number is reset to “0” by the process of step S1221 of the first sub control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command executed before the second round starts Therefore, when the variable winning slot winning command is based on detecting the winning of the first game ball in the second round, the first sub-control unit 400 has the winning number “0”. It is determined that the number is smaller than 10 (Yes in step S1101), the number of winning is increased by 1, and “1” is stored as a value of the winning number in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1103), and the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled. The winning ball acquisition information command is transmitted to the control board, and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation processing at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command is completed. The winning ball acquisition information command includes the number of winning balls acquired based on the number of winnings obtained in the first round, excluding the surplus cumulative number, and the number of winning balls based on the first winning in the second round. The information on the number of winning balls won is added.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), the number of prize balls acquired in the first round is displayed in the prize ball number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second A character image of “165 GET” is displayed in order to notify 165 winning ball winnings, which is a total of 15 winning ball winnings based on the first winning in the round. As a result, the player is notified of the total number of winning balls, excluding the number of winning balls based on the surplus cumulative number at the time of the big hit game.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character image “2R” in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208 because the big hit game is in the second round at the time shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled via a control board that controls the decorative symbol display device for display. As a result, the character image “2R” is continuously displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 20D, the first sub-control unit 400 is in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 when it is in the big hit game and the predetermined notification effect is not executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled via the control board in order to display a character image of “Big hit!” Below the center of the screen. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 can notify the player that the game is a big hit game.

  In the second round, ten game balls have been won in the variable prize opening 234 before the predetermined time (for example, 25 s) has elapsed in the open state of the variable prize slot 234, so the variable prize slot 234 is based on the ten prizes. The closing condition is established. When the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the variable winning port closing command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit flag setting process when receiving the variable winning port closing command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is winning of 10 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 (Yes in step S1501), and sets the closing condition flag to an on state ( Step S1503), the first sub-control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening closing command is ended.

  In this example, for example, in the second round, 11 pieces to the variable prize opening 234 in the second round are in a closed state started after the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is established and within the effective period. Three game balls that will win the 13th to 13th wins. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a variable winning port winning command based on the detection of the winning of the eleventh game ball to the variable winning port 234, the first sub control unit upon receiving the variable winning port winning command The winning ball acquisition information generation process is executed. For example, when the main control unit 300 has transmitted a variable winning award winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 based on detecting the eleventh win in the second round, the first sub-control unit 400 Determines that the winning number included in the winning number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “10” and is not smaller than 10 (No in step S1101), and the surplus number is increased by one. Is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1105), and at this time, the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 is not short and the shortage cumulative number is “0”. It is determined that the shortage cumulative number is not greater than 0 (No in step S1107). Since the surplus cumulative number “1” has already been stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 in the first round, the first sub-control unit 400 increases the surplus cumulative number by 1 and sets “2” as the value of the surplus cumulative number. Is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1113), and the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable prize opening prize command is terminated.

  Also, the first sub-control unit 400 executes substantially the same processing as the eleventh when receiving a variable prize opening prize command based on the twelfth and thirteenth prizes. Thus, when the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command based on the thirteenth winning is completed, the surplus number included in the surplus number information is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. “3” is stored as the value of “4”, and “4” is stored as the value of the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information.

  Prior to the start of the third round of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 20 (e), which starts after the interval time (for example, 2.5 s) has elapsed since the transition to the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 in the second round, For example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process upon reception of the round designation command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure A flag is on and the big hit game is a special hit game with “Special figure A” (Yes in step S1201), and the variable prize opening in the second round. 234 has a total of 13 game balls that exceed a predetermined number (for example, 10), and it is determined that the number of winning is “10” and not smaller than 10 (No in step S1203). Is “3” and is determined to be greater than 0 (Yes in step S1217). Next, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the process of step S1219, refers to the notification effect list table shown in FIG. 18, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A”, and the “variable winning opening closing” “Condition” is “predetermined number (10) winnings”, “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “3”, and “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “3”. “Presentation Y (specific)” is selected as the “predetermined notification effect”, and the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 are preliminarily determined based on the surplus number information and the closing condition flag. A notification effect command for executing “effect Y (specific)” is output as the notification effect of (Step S1219), the winning number information is cleared (Step S1221), the surplus number information is cleared (Step S1223), and the closing is performed. Set matters flag to the OFF state (step S1225), and ends the first sub-control unit award balls acquired information generation process when receiving round specified command.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 20E, “effect Y” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, and an image representing “savohani” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “ "Legend winning!

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the number of winning balls based on winning of game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10) to the variable winning opening 234 in each round is not notified at the start of the round. ing. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 is decorated via the control board in order to notify only the number of winning balls based on a predetermined number (for example, 10 per game) of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234. The symbol display device 208 is controlled. In the jackpot game, 10 or more game balls have won the variable winning opening 234 in the first round and the second land. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20 (e), the number of prize balls acquired in the prize ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is 15 (the number of prize balls for winning one game ball) × 10 (game balls). A character image of “300 GET” indicating that the number of winnings) × 2 (number of rounds) = 300 (pieces) is displayed.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board in order to notify the player of how many rounds are concerned. As a result, as shown in FIG. 20E, a character image “3R” indicating that the round is the third round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The jackpot game is sequentially digested with the third round and the fourth round. For example, at the end of the fourteenth round, a predetermined number (for example, ten per round) of the variable winning opening 234 in the jackpot game. The number of winning game balls exceeding 7 is 7. Also, for example, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have won a prize in the variable prize opening 234 in the fifteenth round. Therefore, at the end of the fifteenth round, “7” is stored as the value of the surplus cumulative number and “0” is stored as the value of the surplus number in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  Next, for example, the following processing is executed prior to the start of the sixteenth round in the jackpot game shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process upon reception of the round designation command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the jackpot game is a jackpot game of “Special Figure A” (Yes in step S1201), and in the fifteenth round, ten game balls win the variable winning slot. Therefore, it is determined that the winning number included in the winning number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “10” and is not smaller than 10 (No in step S1203), and the surplus number is “0”. It is determined that it is not larger than 0 (No in step S1217), the winning number information is cleared (step S1221), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1223), and the closing condition flag is set to an off state (step S1225). The first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process upon reception of the round designation command is terminated.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of winning balls based on winning of game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10) to the variable winning opening 234 in each round until the previous round is not notified at the start of the round. It is configured. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the control board to notify only the number of winning balls obtained based on winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) of gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234. The decorative design display device 208 is controlled. In the jackpot game, a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more of game balls have won a prize in the variable winning opening 234 in the first round to the fifteenth round. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 20 (f), the number of winning balls in the display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is 15 (the number of winning balls for one winning ball) × 10 (game ball winning). A character image “2250 GET” indicating that (number) × 15 (number of rounds) = 2250 (number) is displayed.

  When the above processing is completed, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board in order to notify the player of how many rounds are concerned. As a result, a character image “16R” indicating that the round is the 16th round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative design display device 208 as shown in FIG.

  Further, in the fifteenth round, the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 is 10, and there has been no winning of game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10), so the predetermined notification effect is not executed. Then, a character image “Big hit!” Is displayed below the center portion of the effect display area 208 of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the player that the big hit game is being played.

  In the sixteenth round, 10 game balls were won in the variable winning opening 234 before the open state of the variable winning opening 234 passed a predetermined time (for example, 25 s), so the variable winning opening based on the 10 winning prizes. 234 closing conditions are established. When the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the variable winning port closing command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit flag setting process when receiving the variable winning port closing command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is a winning of 10 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 (Yes in step S1501), and sets the closing condition flag to an on state ( Step S1503), the first sub-control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening closing command is ended.

  In this example, for example, in the 16th round, 11 pieces to the variable prize opening 234 in the 16th round are in a closed state started after the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is established and within the effective period. Two game balls that will win the 12th and 12th will win. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a variable winning port winning command based on the detection of the winning of the eleventh game ball to the variable winning port 234, the first sub control unit upon receiving the variable winning port winning command The winning ball acquisition information generation process is executed. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the winning number included in the winning number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “10” and is not smaller than 10 (No in step S1101), and the surplus The number is incremented by 1, and “1” is stored as a surplus number value in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1105). Since the number is “0”, it is determined that the insufficient cumulative number is not greater than 0 (No in step S1107). Since the surplus cumulative number “7” has already been stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 at the end of the fifteenth round, the first sub-control unit 400 increases the surplus cumulative number by 1 as the value of the surplus cumulative number. “8” is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1113), and the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable prize opening prize command is terminated.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a variable winning award winning command based on the detection of the 12th game ball winning in the variable winning opening 234, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the same processing as described above. When the above processing is completed, “2” is stored as the value of the surplus number included in the surplus number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, and is included in the surplus cumulative number information. “9” is stored as the value of the surplus cumulative number.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses after the variable winning opening 234 shifts to the closed state in the sixteenth round, the main control unit 300 transmits a jackpot end command to the first sub control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the jackpot end command, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a round shown in FIG. 14 so that the predetermined notification effect shown in FIG. 19 can be executed as necessary at the end of the final round. The first sub-control unit award ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the designated command is configured to be executed before the first sub-control unit award ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command shown in FIG. . In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is in a big hit game based on the special drawings A to D when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the big hit end command, and the winning number in the final round is 10 or more. If it is determined that the surplus number in the round is greater than 0, the process of step S1219 may be executed in step S1403. Further, in order to ensure that the predetermined notification effect is not executed at the end of the final round, the pachinko machine 100 acquires the first sub-control unit prize ball upon reception of the round designation command shown in FIG. The information generation process is configured not to be executed.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the jackpot start command executes processing similar to the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation processing at the time of receiving the round designation command shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure A flag is on and the big hit game is a special hit game of “Special figure A” (Yes in step S1201), and the variable prize opening in the sixteenth round 234 has a total of 12 game balls that exceed a predetermined number (for example, 10), and the winning number included in the winning number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “10”. It is determined that it is not smaller than 10 (No in step S1203), and the surplus number is determined to be “2” and larger than 0 (Yes in step S1217). Next, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the process of step S1219, refers to the notification effect list table shown in FIG. 18, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A”, and the “variable winning opening closing” “Condition” is “predetermined number (10) winnings”, “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “2”, and “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2”. “Presentation effect” is selected as “predetermined notification effect”, and the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 are used for the predetermined notification effect based on the surplus number information and the closing condition flag. A notification effect command for executing “effect D” is output (step S1219), the winning number information is cleared (step S1221), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1223), and the closing condition flag is turned off. Set state (step S1225), and ends the first sub-control unit award balls acquired information generation process upon reception round specified command. The notification effect command transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes information on the execution time of “effect D”, for example.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command shown in FIG. For example, since the surplus cumulative number is “9”, the first sub-control unit 400 is larger than 0 (Yes in step S1401), and the control board that controls the decorative symbol display device 208 for the notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information and It outputs to the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (step S1403), stores the winning ball acquisition information in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1405), clears the surplus cumulative number information (step S1407), and wins The number information is cleared (step S1409), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1411), the insufficient accumulated number information is cleared (step S1413), and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command Exit. The notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes, for example, information on the execution time of the notification effect.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 20G, “effect D” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, and an image representing “princess” is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. A character image “Large Prize !!” is displayed, and a sound “Kein Keen Keen” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20 (g), the number of winning balls in the display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is 15 (the number of winning balls for winning one gaming ball) × 10 (the winning of gaming balls). (Number) × 16 (number of rounds) = 2400 (pieces), a character image “2400 GET” is displayed.

  In addition, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “effect D” is started, a predetermined number (for example, the number of the winning prize game 234 is determined based on the notification effect command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 in step S1403 (for example, A notification effect indicating that more than 160 game balls have been won is started. As shown in FIG. 20 (h), for example, a character image “↓↓↓↓ GET” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a sound “Puipy Puy” is heard from the speaker 120. Be emitted. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (i) after the predetermined time has elapsed since the production shown in FIG. 20 (h) is started, for example, in the jackpot game, the surplus cumulative number is “9”. “2535 GET” indicating the total number of winning balls acquired in the jackpot game including the character image “+135” indicating the number of winning balls based on “9” and the number of winning balls based on the surplus cumulative number. Is displayed in the effect display area 208d. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment wins a surplus notification (a character image “+135” in this example) corresponding to information on the number of winning balls based on the surplus accumulated number (surplus winning ball acquisition information). It is configured to notify all at once when the game ends. The pachinko machine 100 is configured to perform notification of information related to winnings (for example, the number of winnings and the number of winning balls) as a surplus notification for a portion exceeding a predetermined number by opening the variable winning opening 234 once. Yes.

  Also, since the jackpot game that has ended is based on the jackpot of “Special Figure A”, the gaming state shifts to a special figure certain change state. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control for displaying a character image “next probability change!” Below the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 notifies the player that the gaming state shifts to the special figure certain change state.

  Although illustration is omitted, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 immediately after the big hit game is finished. For this reason, a total of two special figure 1 variable games are reserved after the jackpot game ends.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (j), prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game related to the special figure 1 start information acquired first after the lapse of the jackpot game, For example, the following processing is executed. The main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random values stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area, and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game starts from now on. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by one, and the special figure 1 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, in this process, the main control unit 300 obtains a special figure timer number determination random value, determines a special figure timer number as a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game, and determines whether or not the result is a success / failure determination result and the special figure timer number Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, the determination result is 16R big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special drawing B”).

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 20 (j), decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward bold arrows in the drawing. The symbol variation display that moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by one. For this reason, the hold display image a2 is deleted as shown in FIG.

  During the special figure 1 variable game, three game balls win the special figure 2 starting port 232 and three special figure 2 variable games are held. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 20 (j), in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold display image corresponding to the special figure 2 variable game held in the first to third pieces. b1 to b3 are displayed respectively, and it is notified that three special figure 2 variable games are put on hold.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20 (j), when the gaming state is in the special figure probability changing state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays “in the middle of probability changing” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. "Is controlled to display a character image. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 notifies the player that the gaming state is in the special figure probability changing state.

  After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the main control unit 300 controls the special figure 1 display device 212 so as to stop and display “Special figure B”, and also issues a symbol fluctuation stop command. 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400. As a result, as shown in FIG. 21A, “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is ranked up. You will be informed that you won the bonus.

  Further, during the special figure 1 game, one game ball is further won at the special figure 2 starting port 232, and one special figure 2 variable game is newly held. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), a hold display image b4 corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 variable game is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The player is informed that four special figure 2 variable games are on hold.

  Prior to the start of the jackpot game started after the end of the notification effect indicating that the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 21A is a jackpot, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot start command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure B flag is on and the big hit game is a special bonus game of “Special figure B” (Yes in step S1001), and decorates the winning ball acquisition information command. The signal is transmitted to a control board (not shown) that controls the symbol display device 208 (step S1003), and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit start command is terminated.

  When the above processing is completed, a character image indicating the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed in the winning ball number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the number of prize balls won in the previous jackpot game was 2535, the number “2535 GET” indicating that the cumulative number of prize balls won from the first win is 2535 is displayed in the prize ball number display area 800. An image is displayed.

  In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 while the special figure B flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is on, the first sub-control unit 400 gives the player a rank-up bonus. The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled via the control board in order to notify that the big hit game has started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 21B, a character image “Rank up bonus!” Is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, one round of the jackpot game related to “Special Figure B” and “Special Figure C” is set to a very short period compared to “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure D”. ing. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not display the number of rounds on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the jackpot game related to “Special Figure B” and “Special Figure C”. It is configured. Therefore, during the jackpot game based on the “Special Figure B”, the number of rounds is not notified.

  The jackpot game is based on winning the “Special Figure B” jackpot. For this reason, the main control unit 300 controls the variable winning opening 234 so that one second is released three times during the first round.

  In the present embodiment, when the first variable winning opening 234 of the first round of the jackpot game is opened, one game ball is won in the open variable winning opening 234, and the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established. Then, one game ball is won in the variable winning opening 234 during the closed state that is started later. The first sub-control unit 400 has “special drawing type” as “special drawing B”, “variable winning opening closing condition” “predetermined time (1 s)”, and “number of winnings after transition to the closed state” "" Is "1" and "the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number" is "1", "effect A" of "predetermined notification effect" is selected. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 21C, “effect A” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, an image representing “panda” in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “wow!” Is displayed. In addition, in “production A”, no sound is emitted from the speaker 120.

  The pachinko machine 100 acquires the number of winning balls in one opening / closing operation in synchronism with the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 executed during one round in the jackpot game related to “Special Figure B” and “Special Figure C”. Is notified to the player according to the number of winnings. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to determine whether or not to notify the number of winning balls acquired based on the winning ball notification threshold stored in the ROM 406. In this embodiment, the prize ball notification threshold is associated with the number of winnings in one opening / closing operation, and is set to “2”, for example. The first sub-control unit 400 notifies the number of winning balls acquired when a game ball having a winning ball notification threshold value or more wins by one opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234. In the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning opening 234 in one round, two game balls have won the variable winning opening 234. Since the number of winning game balls is equal to or greater than the winning ball notification threshold, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the winning ball winning number based on the winning to the variable winning port 234. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), 30 prize balls are added to the prize ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the number of prize balls obtained from the first hit is 2565. A character image “2565 GET” indicating the presence is displayed.

  In the second opening of the variable winning opening 234 that is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the first variable winning opening 234 in the first round of the jackpot game is finished, the game ball is placed in the open variable winning opening 234. Are won, and two game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234 during the closed state that is started after the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established. The first sub-control unit 400 has “special drawing type” as “special drawing B”, “variable winning opening closing condition” “predetermined time (1 s)”, and “number of winnings after transition to the closed state” "" Is "2", and when "the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number" is "2", the "predetermined notification effect" "effect F" is selected. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 21 (d), “effect F” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, and an image representing “princess” is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. A character image “Wane!” Is displayed, and a voice “Cuen” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  In the second opening / closing operation of the variable prize opening 234 in the first round, for example, four game balls having a prize ball notification threshold value “2” or more are won in the variable prize opening 234. The pachinko machine 100 is configured not to notify the winning ball acquisition number based on the winnings exceeding the winning ball notification threshold immediately after the opening / closing operation is finished. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board in order to notify the winning ball acquisition number based on the winning number equal to the winning ball notification threshold value “2”. As a result, 30 prize balls are added to 2565 prize balls obtained after the first opening / closing operation is completed, and as shown in FIG. In the area 800, a character image “2595 GET” indicating that the cumulative number of winning prize balls from the beginning is 2,595 is displayed.

  In the opening / closing operation of the third variable winning opening 234 in the first round, for example, two game balls win the variable winning opening 234 in the open state, and two games enter the variable winning opening 234 during the subsequent effective period. The ball is winning. In the third opening / closing operation of the variable prize opening 234 in the first round, four game balls having a prize ball notification threshold value “2” or more are won in the variable prize opening 234.

  Since the number of winning balls based on the winning amount exceeding the winning ball notification threshold is not notified immediately after the opening / closing operation is finished, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the winning based on the number of winnings equal to the winning ball notification threshold “2”. The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled via the control board to notify the number of balls acquired. As a result, as shown in FIG. 21 (e), 30 winning balls are added to 2595 winning balls acquired after the end of the second opening / closing operation, and the winning symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the area 800, a character image “2625GET” indicating that the cumulative number of winning prize balls from the beginning is 2625 is displayed.

  In the first round, a total of 10 game balls have won the variable prize opening 234. In the first sub-control unit 400, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing B”, and ten or more game balls are won in the variable winning slot 234 in the first round. It is determined that “the number of winnings” is “0 or more” and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0 or more”, and “effect V (special)” is selected as the “predetermined notification effect”. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 21E, “effect V (special)” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, and an image representing “Yoshimune” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A character image “Tan !!!” is displayed, and a voice “Full” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  In the jackpot game, two or more game balls have won in all opening / closing operations of the variable winning opening 234 in all rounds. Further, the total number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 exceeding the winning ball notification threshold “2” during all rounds is 48. Therefore, “48” is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 as the value of the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information. The number of winning balls based on the winning of the 48 game balls is notified collectively after the jackpot game is over. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 21 (f), at the end of the jackpot game, the prize ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 15 (one game ball) which is the number of prize balls in the jackpot game. No. of winning balls for winning) × 2 (number of winning game balls in opening one variable winning port 234 in one round) × 3 (number of opening of variable winning port 234 in one round) × 16 (number of rounds) = 1440 (pieces) is added, and a character image “3975 GET” indicating that the cumulative number of winning prize balls from the beginning is 3975 is displayed.

  The pachinko machine 100 is configured not to execute, for example, the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process upon reception of the round designation command shown in FIG. 14 after the big hit game of “Special Figure B”. For this reason, when the big hit game of “Special Figure B” is finished, the predetermined notification effect is not executed, and when the predetermined time (for example, 2.5 s) elapses after the variable winning opening 234 shifts to the closed state, the main control is performed. The unit 300 transmits a jackpot end command to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the jackpot end command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command shown in FIG. For example, since the surplus cumulative number is “48”, the first sub-control unit 400 is larger than 0 (Yes in step S1401), and the control board that controls the decorative symbol display device 208 for the notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information and It outputs to the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (step S1403), stores the winning ball acquisition information in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1405), clears the surplus cumulative number information (step S1407), and wins The number information is cleared (step S1409), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1411), the insufficient accumulated number information is cleared (step S1413), and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command Exit. The notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes, for example, information on the execution time of the notification effect.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 21 (f), the character image “Rank Up Bonus End” is displayed below the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the pachinko machine 100 has the rank up bonus. The player is informed that the big hit game is finished. After a predetermined time has passed since the notification, a notification effect indicating that a winning game ball exceeding the threshold value has been won in the variable winning opening 234 in the jackpot game is started. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 21 (g), a character image “↓↓↓↓ GET” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is called “Pui Pui Pui” from the speaker 120. A voice is emitted. As shown in FIG. 20 (h) after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the effect shown in FIG. 21 (g), in the jackpot game, there were 48 game balls won in the variable winning opening 234 exceeding the threshold value. , Including a character image “+720” indicating that the number of winning balls based on the winning is 720 (15 × 48) and winnings of all game balls to the variable winning opening 234 in the jackpot game A character image “4695 GET” indicating the number of accumulated winning prize balls from the winning is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  Further, since the ended big hit game was based on the big hit of “Special Figure B”, the game state of the pachinko machine 100 is continued in the special figure certain change state. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control for displaying a character image “next probability change!” Below the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 notifies that the game state of the next special figure variable game shifts to the special figure certain change state.

  Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine that preferentially digests the startup information of the special figure 2 when both of the startup information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are held. As shown in FIG. 21 (i), the special figure 2 variable game related to the special figure 2 starting information that is reserved first, which is started after a lapse of a predetermined time after the big bonus game of "Special figure B" is finished. Prior to the start, for example, the following processing is executed. The main control unit 300 acquires the special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure 2 variable game starts from now. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the data is retained one by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, in this process, the main control unit 300 obtains a special figure timer number determination random value, determines a special figure timer number as a fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game, and determines whether or not the result is a success / failure determination result and the special figure timer number. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, the determination result is 16R big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special drawing D”).

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 21 (i), the decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward bold arrows in the drawing. The symbol variation display that moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image b4 is deleted.

  In addition, since the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game has not changed, the hold display image corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. a1 is displayed and it is notified that one special figure 1 variable game is put on hold.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (i), when the gaming state is in the special figure probability changing state, the first sub-control unit 400 "probably changing" above the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Control to display the character image. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 notifies the player that the gaming state is in the special figure probability changing state.

  After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the main control unit 300 controls the special figure 2 display device 214 to stop and display “special figure D”, and issues a symbol fluctuation stop command. Transmit to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, as shown in FIG. 21 (j), “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 2 variable game has 16 rounds. You will be informed that you won the jackpot.

  Prior to the start of the jackpot game started after the end of the notification effect indicating that the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 21J is a jackpot, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot start command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure D flag is on and the big hit game is a special prize game of “Special figure D” (Yes in step S1001), and decorates the winning ball acquisition information command. The signal is transmitted to a control board (not shown) that controls the symbol display device 208 (step S1003), and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit start command is terminated.

  When the above processing is completed, a character image indicating the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed in the winning ball number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time shown in FIG. 22 (a), since the number of prize balls acquired from the beginning is 4695, the character image “4695GET” indicating that the number of accumulated prize balls acquired is 4695 in the prize ball acquisition number display area 800. Is displayed. Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board is used to notify the player that the jackpot game has started. To control. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22A, a character image “Big hit!” Is displayed below the center portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 and below the center portion of the effect display area 208d.

  Prior to the start of the first round in the jackpot game, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process upon reception of the round designation command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the jackpot game is a jackpot game of “Special Figure D” (Yes in step S1201), and the first sub-control at the time of receiving the jackpot end command at the end of the previous jackpot game. Since the number-of-wins information is cleared in the process for acquiring the prize ball (step S1409), it is determined that the number of winnings is “0” and smaller than 10 (Yes in step S1203), and the first sub-control unit prize Since the surplus accumulated number information is cleared in the ball acquisition information generation process (step S1407), it is determined that the surplus accumulated number is “0” and the surplus accumulated number is not greater than 0 (No in step S1207). Since there is no shortage of the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234, 0 is added to the shortage accumulated number (step S1215), and the winning number information is cleared. (Step S1221), the surplus number information is cleared (Step S1223), the closing condition flag is set to an off state (Step S1225), and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command is terminated. .

  When the above process ends, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the player of what number the round is. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22A, a character image “1R” indicating that the round is the first round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, for example, in the first round, nine game balls are won at the variable winning opening 234 before the open state of the variable winning opening 234 elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 25 s). When the game ball detection means detects the winning of the first to ninth gaming balls within a predetermined number (for example, 10) to the variable winning opening 234 in the first round, the main control unit 300 receives a winning. A variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 every time. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes steps S1101, S1103, and S1115 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command. Therefore, “9” is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 as the value of the winning number included in the winning number information.

  The condition for closing the variable prize opening 234 is established based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) after the first round is started and the variable prize opening 234 is opened. When the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the variable winning port closing command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit flag setting process when receiving the variable winning port closing command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) and that it is not a winning of 10 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 (No in step S1501). Then, the first sub control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening closing command is ended.

  A game ball that is, for example, the tenth to thirteenth prizes in the variable prize opening 234 in the first round in the closed state that is started after the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is established. Four will win. The first sub control unit 400 receives the variable winning award winning command every time it receives a variable winning award winning command based on the detection of the winning of the tenth game ball to the variable winning award 234. Each process of step S1101, step S1103, and step S1115 of the prize ball acquisition information generation process is executed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a variable winning award winning command every time it receives a variable winning award winning command based on detecting the winning of the 11th to 13th game balls in the variable winning opening 234. Step S1101, step S1105, step S1107, and step S1113 of the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process are executed.

  The first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening prize command is executed a total of four times, the process of step S1103 is executed once, and the process of step S1113 is executed three times. In a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 of the control unit 400, “1” is stored as the value of the winning number included in the winning number information, and “3” is stored as the value of the surplus number included in the surplus number information. “3” is stored as the value of the surplus cumulative number included in the cumulative number information.

  Prior to the start of the second round shown in FIG. 22B, which is started after a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 s) after the transition to the closed state of the variable prize opening 234 in the first round, for example, the following processing Is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process upon reception of the round designation command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure D flag is on, and that the big hit game is a special bonus game of “Special figure D” (Yes in step S1201), and the variable prize opening in the first round 234 has a total of 13 game balls that exceed a predetermined number (eg, 10), and the number of winnings included in the winning number information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “10”. It is determined that it is not smaller than 10 (No in step S1203), and the surplus number is determined to be “3” and larger than 0 (Yes in step S1217). Next, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the process of step S1219, referring to the notification effect list table shown in FIG. 18, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing D”, and the “variable winning opening closing” “Condition” is “elapsed predetermined time (25 s)”, “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “4”, and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “3 or more”. As the predetermined notification effect based on the surplus number information and the closing condition flag, the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 are selected. A notification effect command for executing “effect X (specific)” is output (step S1219), the winning number information is cleared (step S1221), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1223), and the closing condition flag is set. The set off state (step S1225), and ends the first sub-control unit award balls acquired information generation process when receiving round specified command.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 22B, “effect X” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, an image representing “Yoshimune” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “ A character image “Large behavior !!!” is displayed, and a sound “Appare” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  The jackpot game is sequentially digested with the second round and the third round, and the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 at the end of the fifteenth round is, for example, “9”. It has become.

  In the sixteenth round, which is the final round of the jackpot game, a variable prize is awarded based on the fact that ten game balls are won in the variable prize slot 234 before the open state of the variable prize slot 234 elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 25 seconds). The closing condition of the mouth 234 is established. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the variable winning port closing command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub control unit flag setting process when receiving the variable winning port closing command, and the closing condition of the variable winning port 234 is variable. It is determined that 10 game balls in the winning opening 234 are won (Yes in step S1501), the closing condition flag is set to the on state (step S1503), and the first sub controller flag at the time of receiving the variable winning opening closing command is received. The setting process ends.

  In the sixteenth round, the game ball 2 is in the closed state started after the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is established, and becomes the 11th and 12th prizes to the variable prize opening 234 within the effective period. Individual wins. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a variable winning award winning command based on detecting the winning of the eleventh game ball to the variable winning opening 234, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the following processing. For example, when the variable winning opening winning command is based on detecting the eleventh winning in the 16th round, the first sub-control unit 400 has ten winning prizes and is not smaller than ten. (No in step S1101), the surplus number is increased by 1, and the value of the surplus number is stored as “1” in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1105). Since the number of winnings is not short and the shortage cumulative number is “0”, it is determined that the shortage cumulative number is not larger than 0 (No in step S1107), and the surplus cumulative number is increased by 1 to obtain the value of the surplus cumulative number. "10" is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1113), and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command is completed.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a variable winning award winning command based on the detection of the winning of the 12th game ball to the variable winning award 234, the first sub control unit 400 executes substantially the same processing as the 11th. As a result, the surplus number included in the surplus number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is “2”, and the value of the surplus accumulated number included in the surplus accumulated number information is “11”. "

  When an interval time (for example, 2.5 s) elapses after the variable winning opening 234 is shifted to the closed state in the 16th round, the main control unit 300 transmits a jackpot end command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the jackpot end command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the same process as the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command shown in FIG. Then, it is determined that the special figure D flag is in an on state and the big hit game is a big hit game of “special figure D” (Yes in step S1201), and a predetermined number (for example, 10) is set in the variable winning opening 234 in the sixteenth round. It is determined that there are a total of 12 game balls winning more than 2), and the winning number included in the winning number information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “10” and is not smaller than 10 ( In step S1203, No), it is determined that the surplus number is “2” and is larger than 0 (Yes in step S1217). Next, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the process of step S1219, referring to the notification effect list table shown in FIG. 18, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing D”, and the “variable winning opening closing” “Condition” is “predetermined number (10) winnings”, “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “2”, and “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2”. “Presentation effect” is selected as “predetermined notification effect”, and the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 are used for the predetermined notification effect based on the surplus number information and the closing condition flag. A notification effect command for executing “effect D” is output (step S1219), the winning number information is cleared (step S1221), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1223), and the closing condition flag is turned off. Set state (step S1225), and ends the first sub-control unit award balls acquired information generation process upon reception round specified command. The notification effect command transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes information on the execution time of “effect D”, for example.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command. For example, since the surplus cumulative number is “11”, the first sub-control unit 400 is larger than 0 (Yes in step S1401), and the control board that controls the decorative symbol display device 208 for the notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information and It outputs to the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (step S1403), stores the winning ball acquisition information in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1405), clears the surplus cumulative number information (step S1407), and wins The number information is cleared (step S1409), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1411), the insufficient accumulated number information is cleared (step S1413), and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command Exit. The notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes, for example, information on the execution time of the notification effect.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 22C, “effect D” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, and an image representing “princess” in the effect display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A character image “Large Prize !!” is displayed, and a sound “Kein Keen Keen” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  In addition, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “effect D” is started, a predetermined number (for example, the number of the winning prize game 234 is determined based on the notification effect command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 in step S1403 (for example, A notification effect indicating that more than 160 game balls have been won is started. As shown in FIG. 22D, for example, a character image “↓↓↓↓ GET” is displayed in the effect display area 208d at the approximate center in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “Puiy” is displayed from the speaker 120. The sound "Puipyui" is emitted. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 (e) after the predetermined time has elapsed since the production shown in FIG. 22 (d) is started, for example, in the big hit game, the surplus cumulative number is “11”. It includes the character image “+165” indicating the number of winning balls based on “11” and the number of winning balls based on the surplus cumulative number acquired in the 16 rounds, and from the first hit (in this example, the previous big hit) A character image “7260GET” indicating the number of accumulated prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  Also, since the jackpot game that has been completed is based on the jackpot of “Special Figure D”, the game state shifts to the special figure low-probability normal figure high-probability state from the next time to the special figure variation game 100 times ahead. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control for displaying a character image “100 times shorter!” Below the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 notifies the player that the gaming state will shift to the short-time state from the next time to the special figure variation game 100 times ahead.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (f), the special figure 2 variable game related to the special figure 2 start information acquired first after the predetermined time elapses after the big bonus game of “Special figure D” ends. Prior to the start, for example, the following processing is executed. The main control unit 300 acquires the special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure 2 variable game starts from now. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the data is retained one by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, in this process, the main control unit 300 obtains a special figure timer number determination random value, determines a special figure timer number as a fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game, and determines whether or not the result is a success / failure determination result and the special figure timer number. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward bold arrows in the drawing. The symbol variation display that moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is reduced by 1, the holding display image b3 is deleted (not shown).

  During the special figure 2 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 2 starting port 232, and three special figure 2 variable games are added and the three prizes are held. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2, a hold display image b3 corresponding to the third special figure 2 variable game is displayed.

  In addition, since the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game has not changed, the hold display image corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. a1 is displayed and it is notified that one special figure 1 variable game is put on hold.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), when the gaming state is in the short-time state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the gaming state in the short-time state above the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In order to notify the existence and the remaining number of time reductions excluding the special figure variable game, control is performed to display a character image “short in time! 99 remaining times”. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 notifies the player that the gaming state is in the short-time state and the number of remaining special figure variable games in the short-time state.

  When the gaming state is in the short-time state, it is relatively easy to win a game ball in the special figure 2 starting port 232. For this reason, 98 special figure 2 variable games are executed thereafter, and the first to 99th special figure 2 variable games are all out of place, for example. Prior to the start of the 100th special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 22 (g), which starts after the 99th special figure 2 variable game ends, for example, the following processing is executed. The The main control unit 300 acquires the special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure 2 variable game starts from now. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the data is retained one by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, in this process, the main control unit 300 obtains a special figure timer number determination random value, determines a special figure timer number as a fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game, and determines whether or not the result is a success / failure determination result and the special figure timer number. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”).

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 22 (g), decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward bold arrows in the drawing. The symbol variation display that moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image b4 is deleted (not shown).

  During the special figure 2 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 2 starting port 232, and four special figure 2 variable games are added and the four prizes are held. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 22 (g), in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2, hold display images b1 to b4 respectively corresponding to the special figure 2 variable games related to the first to fourth hold are provided. Is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (g), since the special figure 2 variable game is the 100th special figure variable game in the short-time state, the first sub-control unit 400 indicates that the game state is the short-time state. And in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in order to notify that the number of executions of the special figure variable game in the short time state is the remaining one and is the special figure variable game in the last short time state. Control is performed to display the character image “Last, medium, short” above the screen. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 notifies that the gaming state is in the short-time state and that it is the last special figure variable game in the short-time state.

  Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, it is easy to advance the game without digesting the special figure 1 variation game during the time-short state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22 (g), during the last special figure 2 variable game in the short-time state, there is no change in the number of special figure 1 variable games held, and one special figure 1 variable game is held. Therefore, in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1, a hold display image a1 corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (h), in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 2 variable game, "decoration 2-decoration 7- Decoration 3 "is stopped and displayed. This notifies the player that the special figure 2 variable game is out of play.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game ends, the time-saving state also ends. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board in order to notify the player that the time reduction state has ended. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22 (h), a character image “short time end” is displayed above the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 notifies the player that the time reduction state has ended.

  To start the special game 2 variable game shown in FIG. 22 (i), which is started after the elapse of a predetermined time after “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Prior to this, for example, the following processing is executed. The main control unit 300 acquires the special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure 2 variable game starts from now. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the data is retained one by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, in this process, the main control unit 300 obtains a special figure timer number determination random value, determines a special figure timer number as a fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game, and determines whether or not the result is a success / failure determination result and the special figure timer number. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 22 (i), decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward bold arrows in the drawing. The symbol variation display that moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image b4 is deleted.

  In addition, since the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game has not changed, the hold display image corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. a1 is displayed and it is notified that one special figure 1 variable game is put on hold.

  At the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the game state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal state. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is acquired by the big hit game or the small hit game executed from the first hit to the last hit when the short-time state ends and the game state returns to the normal state. The total winning ball winning number including the winning ball winning number based on the cumulative number won before the variable winning opening 234 is closed and the winning ball winning number based on the surplus cumulative number is notified. . For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board in order to notify the total number of accumulated prize balls acquired from the first hit to the last hit. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22 (i), “current time” indicating the total number of accumulated winning balls from the first hit to the last hit in the effect display area 208d above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed as a character image.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is a control board that controls the decorative symbol display device 208 at the start of the special figure changing game at the end of the short state when both the normal figure probability fluctuation flag and the short time flag are turned off. After transmitting a command including information on the total number of accumulated winning balls, the accumulated winning ball acquisition information stored in the RAM 408 is cleared.

  The success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is, for example, out of order, and thereafter, the special figure 2 variable game held in the first to third pieces is sequentially digested. For example, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game held on the first and second pieces is out of place.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the third special figure 2 variable game, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. “Decoration 1—Decoration 2—Decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the special figure 2 variable game is a small hit. Although not shown, “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214.

  Further, since all the special figure 2 variable games that have been put on hold have been consumed, no hold display image is displayed in the hold display area 208d2.

  In addition, since the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game has not changed, the hold display image corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. a1 is displayed and it is notified that one special figure 1 variable game is put on hold.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if a winning ball is won and a game ball is won in the variable winning opening 234, an effect based on the winning is not executed. For this reason, in the end effect of the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 23A, the character image “Sorry for the small hit!” Is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game related to the special figure 1 start information acquired first after the predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the small hit game, for example, the following processing is executed. . The main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random values stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area, and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game starts from now on. The stored special figure 1 random number set is deleted, and the special figure 1 holding number is further subtracted by one. Further, in this process, the main control unit 300 obtains a special figure timer number determination random value, determines a special figure timer number as a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game, and determines whether or not the result is a success / failure determination result and the special figure timer number Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, the success / failure determination result is 2R big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special drawing F”).

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward bold arrows in the drawing. The symbol variation display that moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a1 is deleted.

  After the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 1 game, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 include “decoration 1-decoration 3”. -Decoration 5 "is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is 2R big hit. Although not shown, “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214.

  In addition, during the special figure 1 variable game, three game balls are won at the special figure 1 starting port 230. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1, the hold display image a1 corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game and the second hold are reserved. The reserved display image a2 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game and the reserved display image a3 corresponding to the third special figure 1 variable game are displayed, and a total of three special figure 1 variable games are held. It has been reported that

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the winning ball acquisition information generation process shown in FIGS. 12 to 17 in accordance with the command received during the big hit game based on “Special Figure F”. It has become. In this example, the big hit game is finished without winning any game balls in the variable winning opening 234. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing EF” and the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined time (0.4 s) has elapsed”. The predetermined notification effect is “effect Z (probability notification effect)”. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 has a predetermined value even if a game ball wins the variable winning opening 234 within the effective period after the condition of “predetermined time (0.4 s) has passed” in the big hit game of “Special Figure F”. The notification effect is not executed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is configured not to notify the number of winning balls acquired even if a game ball wins the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game of “Special Figure F”. When the big hit game based on “special drawing F” is finished, the gaming state becomes a special drawing low probability normal drawing high probability state and is shifted to the electric support state. When the gaming state shifts to the electric support state, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the chance mode has been entered. As a result, as shown in FIG. 23 (d), a character image “chance mode entry” is displayed at substantially the center in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is arranged in the right stream flow path of the game board 124. For this reason, when the gaming state shifts to the electric support state after the big hit game is over, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to make the player proceed with the right-handed game, and right-handed. Notification. As a result, as shown in FIG. 23 (d), a character image “right-handed” is displayed on the upper right side of the effect display area 208 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game related to the special figure 1 start information acquired first after the elapse of a predetermined time from the end of the jackpot game, for example, the following processing is executed. The main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random values stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area, and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game starts from now on. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by one, and the special figure 1 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, in this process, the main control unit 300 obtains a special figure timer number determination random value, determines a special figure timer number as a fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game, and determines whether or not the result is a success / failure determination result and the special figure timer number. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, the success / failure determination result is 2R big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special drawing E”).

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 23 (e), decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward bold arrows in the drawing. The symbol variation display that moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a3 is deleted.

  When the gaming state is the electric support state and the chance mode is in progress, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that it is in the chance mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 23 (e), a character image “in chance mode” is displayed above the center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  During the special figure 1 variable game, two game balls are won in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 23 (e), the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2 holds the hold display image b1 corresponding to the first special figure 2 variable game and the second hold. The hold display image b2 corresponding to the special figure 2 variable game is displayed, and it is notified that a total of two special figure 2 variable games are held.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c as shown in FIG. The stop display is made to notify that the special figure 1 variable game is a 2R big hit. Although not shown, “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212.

  Even after winning the jackpot game related to “Special Figure E” and the end of the special figure 1 variable game, the electric support state is continued. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board in order to notify that the chance mode is continued and that the right hand is instructed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 23 (g), the character image “Continue Chance Mode” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “right-handed” is displayed to the right in the effect display area 208d. "And a character image" are displayed.

  For example, the following processing is executed prior to the start of the big hit game that is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the notification that the chance mode is continued. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot start command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure E flag is on and the big hit game is a special hit game of “Special figure E” (No in step S1001), and the first big control game 400 receives the first big hit game when receiving the big hit start command. 1 sub control part prize ball acquisition information generation processing is ended.

  At the start of the first round, since the game ball has not won the variable winning opening 234, the execution condition of the “predetermined notification effect” shown in FIG. 18 is not satisfied. For this reason, a predetermined notification effect is not executed at the start of the first round. In this example, the first round is completed without winning a single game ball at the variable winning opening 234.

  Since the game ball is not won in the variable winning opening 234 at the start of the second round that is started after the lapse of the predetermined time after the first round is ended, the execution condition of the “predetermined notification effect” shown in FIG. Not satisfied. For this reason, a predetermined notification effect is not executed at the start of the second round. In the second round, for example, one game ball wins the variable prize opening 234 within the effective period from when the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is established to when the variable prize opening 234 is closed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the variable winning opening winning command executes a first sub control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the value of the winning number included in the winning number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “0” and the winning number is less than 10 (Yes in step S1101). The winning number information is incremented by 1, and the winning number information including the increased winning number “1” is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1103), and a winning ball is obtained on the control board that controls the decorative symbol display device 208. The information command is transmitted (step S1115), and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command is terminated. Although a winning ball acquisition information command is transmitted to the control board or the like, the winning ball amount based on the winning is outside the winning ball acquisition information, and the player is not notified of the winning ball acquisition number.

  When an interval time (for example, 2.5 s) elapses after the variable winning opening 234 shifts to the closed state in the second round, the main control unit 300 transmits a jackpot end command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the jackpot end command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the same process as the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command shown in FIG. Then, it is determined that the special figure E flag is on and the big hit game is not a big hit game from "Special figure A" to "Special figure D" (No in step S1201), and special figure EF winning notification process (step S1205) To start. In the special figure EF winning notification process, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notification effect list table shown in FIG. 18 and the “special figure type” is “special figure E” and the “variable prize opening closing condition”. Is “elapsed predetermined time (0.4 s)”, “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “1 or more”, and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “0 or more”. “Presentation notification effect” is selected as “Presence notification Z”, and the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 are set as “prediction notification effect Z”. A notification effect command for executing “(Probability change notification effect)” is output (step S1301), and the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command ends. The notification effect command transmitted to the control board or the sound source IC 416 includes, for example, information on the execution time of “effect Z (probability change notification effect)”.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the surplus cumulative number is “0” and is not greater than 0 (No in step S1401), and stores the winning ball acquisition information in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1405). ), The surplus accumulated number information is cleared (step S1407), the winning number information is cleared (step S1409), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1411), the insufficient accumulated number information is cleared (step S1413), and the big hit ends. The first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of command reception ends.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 23 (h), “effect Z (probability notification effect) is executed as a predetermined notification effect, and“ princess ”is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The displayed image and the character image “determined to be surely changed!” Are displayed, and a sound “probable change” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game related to the special figure 2 start information acquired first after the elapse of a predetermined time after the completion of the "production Z" as the predetermined notification effect, for example, the following Processing is executed. The main control unit 300 acquires the special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure 2 variable game starts from now. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the data is retained one by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, in this process, the main control unit 300 obtains a special figure timer number determination random value, determines a special figure timer number as a fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game, and determines whether or not the result is a success / failure determination result and the special figure timer number. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, the success / failure determination result is 2R big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special drawing F”).

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 23 (i), the decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward bold arrows in the drawing. The symbol variation display that moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image b2 is deleted.

  Also, since the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has not changed, the special figure 1 reserved display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to the special figure 1 variable games held in the first and second games. The hold display images a1 and a2 to be displayed are respectively displayed, and it is informed that two special figure 1 variable games are held.

  In addition, since the previous big hit game was based on the big hit of “special figure E”, the game state after the big hit game is shifted to the special figure certain change state. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control for displaying the character image “probably changing” above the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 notifies that the gaming state is in the special figure certain change state.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 2 game, as shown in FIG. 23 (j), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 have “decoration 1-decoration 3”. -Decoration 5 "is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the special figure 2 variable game is 2R big hit. Although not shown, “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214.

  When the big hit game based on “special drawing F” is finished, the gaming state shifts to the electric support state, so that the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to enter the chance mode. Notify in the game start effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24A, the character image “chance mode entry” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, when the gaming state shifts to the electric support state, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can advance the game by right-handed, and a right-handed notification is given, for example, the big hit game Execute in the start effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24A, a character image “right-handed” is displayed on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Also, since the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has not changed, the special figure 1 reserved display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to the special figure 1 variable games held in the first and second games. The hold display images a1 and a2 to be displayed are respectively displayed, and it is informed that two special figure 1 variable games are held.

  Also, since the number of special figure 2 variable games held has not changed, the special figure 2 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d2 of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a hold display image corresponding to the first special figure 2 variable game. b1 is displayed, and it is notified that one special figure 2 variable game is put on hold.

  In the jackpot game of the “special drawing F”, for example, a total of 10 game balls have won in the variable winning opening 234 in the first round and the second round. The opening pattern of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game of “Special Figure F” is 0.4 s (one opening time (seconds)) × 1 (number of opening in 1R) × 2 times (number of rounds). . For this reason, it is unrealistic that ten game balls win the variable winning opening 234 in the jackpot game of “Special Figure F”, and it is considered that some error has occurred or that an illegal act has been performed. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the table shown in FIG. 18, selects the “error notification effect” as the predetermined notification effect, and executes the “error notification effect”. A notification effect command is output to the control board for controlling 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), an “error notification effect” which is a predetermined notification effect is executed, and “bad dish merchant Echigoya” is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. And a character image “Yo no Uo” are displayed, and the speaker 120 repeatedly emits a sound “Error. Please check the platform” a predetermined number of times.

  When the error of the pachinko machine 100 is canceled, the “error notification effect” as the predetermined notification effect ends. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game related to the special figure 2 start information acquired first after the elapse of a predetermined time after the error is canceled, for example, the following processing is executed. The main control unit 300 acquires the special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure 2 variable game starts from now. The stored special figure 2 random value set is deleted, and the special figure 2 holding number is further subtracted by one. Further, in this process, the main control unit 300 obtains a special figure timer number determination random value, determines a special figure timer number as a fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game, and determines whether or not the result is a success / failure determination result and the special figure timer number. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, the determination result is 16R big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special drawing D”).

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 24C, the decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward bold arrows in the drawing. The symbol variation display that moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 hold number is decreased by 1, the hold display image b1 is deleted.

  Also, since the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has not changed, the special figure 1 reserved display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to the special figure 1 variable games held in the first and second games. The hold display images a1 and a2 to be displayed are respectively displayed, and it is informed that two special figure 1 variable games are held.

  Further, since the gaming state is the electric support state and the chance mode is in progress, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board to notify that it is in the chance mode. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 24C, a character image “in chance mode” is displayed above the center in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 2 variable game, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The stop display is made to notify that the special figure 2 variable game is 16R big hit. Although not shown, “Special Figure D” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214.

  In addition, three game balls are won at the special figure 2 starting port 232 during the special figure 2 variable game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold display image b1 corresponding to the special figure 2 variable game held in the first to third pieces is displayed. ˜b3 are displayed respectively, and it is notified that a total of three special figure 2 variable games are put on hold.

  Prior to the start of the big hit game that is started after the stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c shown in FIG. 24D, for example, the following processing is executed. The The first sub control unit 400 that has received the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot start command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure D flag is on and the big hit game is a special prize game of “Special figure D” (Yes in step S1001), and decorates the winning ball acquisition information command. The signal is transmitted to a control board (not shown) that controls the symbol display device 208 (step S1003), and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit start command is terminated.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 24E, a character image indicating the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed in the winning ball number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the jackpot of the “special drawing D” is the first win and the cumulative number of awarded winning balls is 0, a character image “0GET” indicating that the accumulated number of winning winning balls is 0 is displayed in the winning ball earned number display area 800. Is displayed. Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board is used to notify the player that the jackpot game has started. To control. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24 (e), a character image “Big hit!” Is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, for example, the following processing is executed prior to the start of the first round in the jackpot game shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process upon reception of the round designation command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure D flag is on and the jackpot game is a jackpot game of “Special Figure D” (Yes in step S1201), and the jackpot game is the first hit. Since there is no predetermined number of 10 game balls in the variable winning slot 234 in the previous round, it is determined that the number of winning balls is “0” and smaller than 10 (Yes in step S1203), and the surplus accumulation It is determined that the number is “0” and the surplus cumulative number is not larger than 0 (No in step S1207). Since there is no shortage of the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 at present, the shortage cumulative number is 0. Is added (step S1215), the winning number information is cleared (step S1221), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1223), and the closing condition flag is set to the OFF state (step S1221). S1225), and ends the first sub-control unit award balls acquired information generation process when receiving round specified command.

  When the above processing is completed, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board in order to notify the player of how many rounds are concerned. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24E, a character image “1R” indicating that the round is the first round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the first round, for example, nine game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234, and a predetermined time (25 s) that is the opening time of one round of the variable winning opening 234 elapses before the tenth game ball wins. Resulting in.

  When the game ball detecting means detects the winning of the first to ninth gaming balls within the predetermined number to the variable winning opening 234 in one round, the main control unit 300 makes a variable winning opening winning command for each winning. Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes steps S1101, S1103, and S1115 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command. When a total of nine winning ball acquisition information generation processes are executed, the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 includes winning number information including a winning number “9”, surplus number information including a surplus number “0”, The surplus accumulated number information including the surplus accumulated number “0” and the deficient accumulated number information including the deficient accumulated number “0” are respectively stored.

  When the above processing is completed, the number of winning balls based on the winning of the ninth game ball in the variable winning opening 234 in the first round is notified. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 24F, a character image “135 GET” indicating that the number of winning balls won is displayed in the winning ball winning number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24F, in order to notify that the big hit game is the first round, “1R” indicating that the round is displayed in the round display area 700 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is “1R”. A character image is displayed. In addition, since the game is a big hit game, a character image “Big hit!” Is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the first round, after the variable prize slot 234 is opened, nine game balls are won in the variable prize slot 234, and then a variable prize is awarded based on a predetermined time (for example, 25 s). The closing condition of the mouth 234 is established. When the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the variable winning port closing command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit flag setting process when receiving the variable winning port closing command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) and not 10 game balls (No in Step S1501), and the variable prize opening is determined. The first sub-control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the close command is terminated.

  In the first round, a closed state is started after the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is established, and no game ball is won, for example, in the variable prize opening 234 within the effective period.

  Prior to the start of the second round of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 24 (g), which is started after the passage of the interval time (for example, 2.5 s) from the transition to the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 in the first round. For example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process upon reception of the round designation command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the jackpot game is a jackpot game of “Special Figure D” (Yes in step S1201), and the number of game balls won in the variable winning slot 234 in the first round is Since the total number is 9 and less than a predetermined number (for example, 10), it is determined that the number of winning prizes is “9” and smaller than 10 (Yes in step S1203), and the surplus cumulative number is “0”. Since it is determined that the surplus cumulative number is not greater than 0 (No in step S1207), the shortage number of winnings in the first round is 1 (= 10 (predetermined number) -9 (winning number)). The shortage “1” of the number of winnings in the first round is added to the number, and “1” is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1215), the winning number information is cleared (step S1221), and the surplus number Information A (step S1223), the closing condition flag is set to OFF state (step S1225), to the first ends sub-control section award balls acquired information generation process when receiving round specified command.

  Although the number of winnings in the first round is one less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) at the start of the second round, the surplus cumulative number is currently zero, so the variable winning opening 234 in the first round is The shortage of winnings cannot be replenished. Accordingly, the first sub-control unit 400 passes the control board to notify the number of winning balls obtained based on the winning of nine game balls, which is one less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) to the variable winning opening 234. The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24G, a character image “135 GET” indicating that the number of prize balls is 135 is displayed in the prize ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a predetermined notification effect when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 does not exceed a predetermined number (for example, 10) as in the first round. Regulates. For this reason, the predetermined notification effect is not executed as shown in FIG.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board in order to notify the player of how many rounds are concerned. As a result, a character image “2R” indicating that the round is the second round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative design display device 208 as shown in FIG.

  In the second round, during the open state of the variable winning opening 234, 10 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234 before a predetermined time (for example, 25 seconds) that is the opening time of the variable winning opening 234 elapses. Yes.

  When the game ball detecting means detects the winning of the first to tenth game balls within the predetermined number to the variable winning opening 234 in one round, the main control unit 300 makes a variable winning opening winning command for each winning. Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes steps S1101, S1103, and S1115 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command. Since the award ball acquisition information generation process is executed a total of 10 times, the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 includes the winning number information including the winning number “10”, the surplus number information including the surplus number “0”, The surplus accumulated number information including the surplus accumulated number “0” and the deficient accumulated number information including the deficient accumulated number “1” are respectively stored.

  In the second round, for example, 10 game balls are won in the variable prize opening 234 before the open state of the variable prize slot 234 has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 25 s), so the variable prize is awarded based on the 10 prizes. The closing condition of the mouth 234 is established. When the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the variable winning port closing command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit flag setting process when receiving the variable winning port closing command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is winning of 10 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 (Yes in step S1501), and sets the closing condition flag to an on state ( Step S1503), the first sub-control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening closing command is ended.

  In the second round, the eleventh and twelfth to the variable prize opening 234 in the second round are in a closed state that is started after the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is established and within the effective period. Two winning game balls will win. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a variable winning award winning command based on detecting the winning of the eleventh game ball to the variable winning opening 234, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the following processing. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the winning number included in the winning number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “10” and is not smaller than 10 (No in step S1101), and the surplus The number is incremented by 1 and “1” is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 as the value of the surplus number (step S1105), and it is determined that the insufficient cumulative number is “1” and greater than 0 (Yes in step S1107). ), The surplus number is reduced by 1 and “0” is stored as a surplus number value in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1109), the deficient accumulated number is reduced by 1 and the deficient accumulated value is set to “0”. Store (step S1111), and output a winning ball acquisition information command including information on the number of winning balls in the jackpot game to the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 (Step S1115), and ends the first sub-control unit award balls acquired information generation processing of the variable winning opening winning command is received.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 24 (h), which will be described later, winning balls are obtained by adding the number of winning balls based on winning of the eleventh game ball to the variable winning opening 234 in the second round. A character image indicating the number 300 is displayed in the winning ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there is a shortage in the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234, and when the number of gaming balls wins over a predetermined number (for example, 10) in the next round. The winning ball acquisition information is notified by compensating for the shortage by winning a game ball exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a variable winning award winning command based on the detection of the winning of the twelfth game ball to the variable winning opening 234, for example, the first sub control unit 400 executes the following processing. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the number of winning prizes is “10” and is not smaller than 10 (No in step S1101), increases the surplus number by 1, and sets “1” as the surplus number value to the RAM 408. In the predetermined storage area (step S1105), it is determined that the shortage accumulated number is “0” and not larger than 0 (No in step S1107), and the surplus accumulated number is increased by 1 to obtain the value of the surplus accumulated number. "1" is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1113), and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command is completed.

  Prior to the start of the third round of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 24 (h), which is started after the interval time (for example, 2.5 s) has elapsed since the transition to the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 in the second round, For example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process upon reception of the round designation command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure D flag is in an on state and the big hit game is a big hit game of “special figure D” (Yes in step S1201), and the variable prize opening in the second round There are a total of 12 game balls won in 234 exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10), and one of them is used to supplement the shortage of game balls in the variable winning opening 234 in the first round. Since it was used, it is determined that the winning number is “10” and not smaller than 10 (No in Step S1203), and the surplus number is determined to be “1” and larger than 0 (Yes in Step S1217). Next, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the process of step S1219, referring to the notification effect list table shown in FIG. 18, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing D”, and the “variable winning opening closing” “Condition” is “predetermined number (10) winnings”, “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “2”, and “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2”. “Presentation effect” is selected as “predetermined notification effect”, and the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 are used for the predetermined notification effect based on the surplus number information and the closing condition flag. A notification effect command for executing “effect D” is output (step S1219), the winning number information is cleared (step S1221), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1223), and the closing condition flag is turned off. Set state (step S1225), and ends the first sub-control unit award balls acquired information generation process upon reception round specified command.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 24H, “effect D” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, and an image representing “princess” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A character image “Large Wins !!!” is displayed, and a sound “Kein Keen Keen” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 in order to notify the player how many rounds are concerned. As a result, a character image “3R” indicating that the round is the third round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG.

  The jackpot game is sequentially digested as the third round and the fourth round. For example, at the start of the sixteenth round, a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) of the variable winning opening 234 in the jackpot game. The number of winning game balls exceeding 8 is 8. Therefore, at the end of the 16th round, “8” is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 as the value of the surplus cumulative number.

  In the 16th round, which is the final round of the jackpot game, for example, 10 game balls have been won in the variable winning opening 234 before the variable winning opening 234 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 25 seconds). The closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established based on the winning. When the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the variable winning port closing command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit flag setting process when receiving the variable winning port closing command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is winning of 10 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 (Yes in step S1501), and sets the closing condition flag to an on state ( Step S1503), the first sub-control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening closing command is ended.

  In this example, for example, in the 16th round, the 11th to the variable prize opening 234 in the 16th round and within the valid period during the closed state that starts after the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is established and Two game balls that will win the 12th will win. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the variable prize slot winning command based on the detection of the eleventh and twelfth game balls winning in the variable prize slot 234, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the variable prize slot winning command. 1 sub control part prize ball acquisition information generation processing is executed. For example, when the main control unit 300 transmits a variable winning prize winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 based on detection of the eleventh and twelfth winnings in the sixteenth round, The sub-control unit 400 executes each process of step S1101, step S1105, step S1107, and step S1113 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning award winning command.

  When the above processing is completed, the surplus number information including the surplus number “2” and the surplus accumulated number information including the surplus accumulated number “10” are stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, respectively.

  When an interval time (for example, 2.5 s) elapses after the variable winning opening 234 is shifted to the closed state in the 16th round, the main control unit 300 transmits a jackpot end command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the jackpot end command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the same process as the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command shown in FIG. Then, it is determined that the special figure D flag is in an on state and the big hit game is a big hit game of “special figure D” (Yes in step S1201), and a predetermined number (for example, 10) is set in the variable winning opening 234 in the 16th round. It is determined that there are a total of 12 game balls won exceeding 2), the number of winning is “10” and not smaller than 10 (No in step S1203), and the surplus number is “2” and 0. It is determined that it is larger (Yes in step S1217). Next, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the process of step S1219, referring to the notification effect list table shown in FIG. 18, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing D”, and the “variable winning opening closing” “Condition” is “predetermined number (10) winnings”, “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “2”, and “number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2”. “Presentation effect” is selected as “predetermined notification effect”, and the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 are used for the predetermined notification effect based on the surplus number information and the closing condition flag. A notification effect command for executing “effect D” is output (step S1219), the winning number information is cleared (step S1221), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1223), and the closing condition flag is turned off. Set state (step S1225), and ends the first sub-control unit award balls acquired information generation process upon reception round specified command. The notification effect command transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes information on the execution time of “effect D”, for example.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command. For example, since the surplus cumulative number is “10”, the first sub-control unit 400 is larger than 0 (Yes in step S1401), and a control board that controls the decorative symbol display device 208 with a notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information, and It outputs to the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (step S1403), stores the winning ball acquisition information in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 (step S1405), clears the surplus cumulative number information (step S1407), and wins The number information is cleared (step S1409), the surplus number information is cleared (step S1411), the insufficient accumulated number information is cleared (step S1413), and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command Exit. The notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes, for example, information on the execution time of the notification effect.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 24 (i), “effect D” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, and an image representing “princess” is displayed in the effect display area 208 d 1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A character image “Large Prize !!” is displayed, and a sound “Kein Keen Keen” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 24 (i), in order to notify that the big hit game is the 16th round, a character image “16R” is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the “notification D” of the predetermined notification effect, a notification effect indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 160) of game balls has been won in the variable winning opening 234 in the jackpot game is started. Is done. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 24 (j), a character image “↓↓↓↓ GET” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character “Puy Pui Pui” is displayed from the speaker 120. A voice is emitted. As shown in FIG. 25 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the effect shown in FIG. 24 (j), since the surplus cumulative number is “10” in the big hit game, the prize based on the surplus cumulative number “10”. A character image “+150” indicating the number of balls acquired and a character image “2550 GET” indicating the total number of winning balls in the jackpot game including the number of winning balls based on the surplus cumulative number are displayed in the effect display area 208d. Is displayed.

  Also, since the jackpot game that has been completed is based on the jackpot of “Special Figure D”, the game state shifts to the special figure low-probability normal figure high-probability state from the next time to the special figure variation game 100 times ahead. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control for displaying a character image “100 times next time!” Below the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 notifies that the gaming state shifts to the short-time state from the next time to the special figure variation game 100 times ahead.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine including a winning means (for example, the variable winning opening 234), and information related to the number of game balls won in the winning means (for example, award) Notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a speaker 120) capable of providing notification corresponding to the ball acquisition information), and the notification means has a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls won in the winning means. The surplus notifications corresponding to the information related to the number of game balls (for example, surplus winning ball acquisition information) when the number exceeds the predetermined number can be collectively executed at a predetermined time (for example, when a round designation command is received) Step S1219 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process. The predetermined number of times may be one time or a plurality of times.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the prize ball acquisition information notification means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120) has a predetermined number (for example, the variable prize opening 234) in an open state (for example, the variable prize opening 234). The surplus winning ball acquisition information based on the winnings exceeding 10) is broadcasted once or a plurality of times (for example, step S1219 of the first sub control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command). It is configured.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to notify the player as if a special benefit was given. For example, if all winning ball acquisition information is performed every time a winning of a game ball to a predetermined winning means is detected, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the number of winning balls obtained. In such a case, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the winning ball obtained by notifying the surplus winning ball acquisition information based on the winning of gaming balls exceeding a predetermined number in one time or a plurality of times. In some cases, the number can be easily recognized by the player. In particular, when notifying the surplus prize ball acquisition information all at once, the player can obtain not only the number of prize balls obtained but also the number of prize balls that can be obtained only by winning a predetermined number of game balls. May be easily recognized.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a game ball detection unit (for example, various sensors 320) that detects a game ball that has won a winning unit (for example, the variable winning port 234), and the winning unit detects the gaming ball. When the means detects a predetermined number of game balls, the state is changed from an open state to a closed state, and when the game ball detection means detects a game ball after detecting the predetermined number of game balls, a surplus notification is made at a predetermined time. It can be executed collectively.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the condition for shifting the control state of the winning means from the open state to the closed state is a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls by the game ball detecting means in the open state. (For example, “predetermined number (10) winnings” in the “variable winning opening closing condition” shown in FIG. 18), and the prize ball acquisition information notifying means detects the game after detecting the predetermined number. The surplus prize ball acquisition information based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection means is configured to be notified once or a plurality of times.

  The pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration notifies the winning ball acquisition information based on winnings exceeding a predetermined number of game balls, which is a closing condition of predetermined winning means, in one or more times. Therefore, there may be a case where it is possible for the player to easily recognize how many prize balls are based on the game balls won in excess of a predetermined number (for example, 10) or how much is won. In particular, when notifying the surplus winning ball acquisition information all at once, it is based on winning of a predetermined number of gaming balls for one special gaming state (for example, 160 for 16R big hit and 20 for 2R big hit). The player may be able to recognize the winning ball acquisition information.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment relates to the winning every time the game ball detecting means detects the winning of the game ball until the notifying means wins a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls to the winning means. Information for information can be executed. An example of the notification means is prize ball acquisition information notification means, and an example of information related to winning is prize ball acquisition information.

  The pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration not only makes it easy for the player to recognize that a predetermined winning means has won a game ball during the special gaming state, but also allows the player to recognize the game ball to the predetermined winning means. Since the method of notifying the winning ball acquisition information can be different between the case where the number of winning prizes is a predetermined number and the case where the number of winning prizes exceeds the predetermined number, a prize based on the fact that the number of winning prizes exceeds the predetermined number. In some cases, notification of the ball acquisition information can make the player have an interest in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, information related to winning is obtained by cumulatively adding the number of winning balls based on the detection of the game ball detecting means as information (for example, winning ball acquisition information) related to winning by the notification means. Information on the total number of winning balls including other information can be notified.

  For example, the prize ball acquisition information notification means, which is an example of notification means, includes, as information related to winning, all prizes including prize ball acquisition information, which is an example of the information, and surplus prize ball acquisition information, which is an example of other information. It is configured to notify the ball acquisition information.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a special winning / failing determination result (for example, a special jackpot relating to “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure D”) among the specific winning / failing determination results when the prize ball acquisition information notification means is in the specific gaming state ) In accordance with the special gaming state (for example, special figure high-accuracy state, short-time state), in addition to all winning ball acquisition information notified in the previous special gaming state (for example, a big hit start command) The first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of reception is configured from Yes in step S1001 to step S1003).

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the transition to the special gaming state is not based on the special determination result of the special gaming state (for example, the first sub control unit winning ball acquisition information at the time of receiving the big hit start command) In step S1001 of the generation process, the winning ball acquisition information notifying means notifies the winning ball acquisition information from the initial value from the special gaming state (for example, first sub control unit winning ball acquisition information at the time of receiving the big hit start command) It is configured as in step S1001 of the generation process.

  Next, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, an example is described in which notification of the number of winning balls based on winning of game balls to a variable winning opening 234 exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) is executed as surplus notification every four rounds. To do. FIG. 26A to FIG. 26I show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In FIG. 26 (a) to FIG. 26 (i), in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character image “Big hit!” Is displayed in order to notify that the big hit game is being played. .

  FIG. 26A shows a point in time when the fourth round in the 16-round jackpot game is over. Therefore, a character image “4R” indicating that the round is the fourth round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the first to fourth rounds of the jackpot game, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) or more of game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234. The number of winning balls based on winning a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) of game balls at the end of the fourth round is 150 (the number of winning balls in one round) × 4 (round) = 600 (pieces). For this reason, a character image “600 GET” indicating that the number of prize balls acquired is 600 is displayed in the prize ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, a 4R winning number indicating the number of winning game balls within a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) to the variable winning opening 234 every four rounds. And 4R surplus number information including a 4R surplus accumulated number indicating the number of winning game balls that exceed a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) in the variable winning opening 234 for every four rounds. Is remembered.

  In this example, for example, at the end of the fourth round, a total of 43 game balls have won in the variable winning opening 234. Therefore, when the fourth round is completed, “40” is stored as a value of the number of winnings included in the 4R winning number information in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the 4R surplus cumulative number of pieces included in the 4R surplus cumulative number information is stored. “3” is stored as a value.

  Prior to the start of the fifth round, which is started after the end of the fourth round and an interval time (for example, 2.5 s), for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command including information that the fifth round is started transmitted from the main control unit 300 receives the first sub-control unit prize ball upon reception of the round designation command shown in FIG. Instead of the acquisition state generation process, the following first sub control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process is executed when a round designation command is received. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the jackpot game is a 16-round jackpot game, and the 4R winning number stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “40” and a predetermined number for four rounds. The 4R surplus accumulated number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is determined to be “3” and greater than 0, and the number of winning balls obtained based on the 4R surplus accumulated number is determined. In order to notify, the 4R surplus accumulated number information and the notification effect command are output to the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120, the 4R winning number information is cleared, and the 4R surplus accumulated information is cleared. The number information is cleared, and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command is terminated. The notification effect command based on the 4R surplus cumulative number information transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes, for example, information on the execution time of the notification effect.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 26B, a character image “↓↓↓↓ GET” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The voice “Puipy Puy” is emitted. Also, the fifth round is started. Therefore, a character image “5R” indicating that the round is the fifth round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative design display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (c) after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the effect shown in FIG. 26 (b), “+45” indicating that the number of winning balls based on the 4R surplus cumulative number is 45. The character image and the character image “645GET” indicating the total number of winning balls acquired in the jackpot game, including the number of winning balls based on the 4R surplus cumulative number, are displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  The big hit game is sequentially digested with the fifth round and the sixth round, and FIG. 26 (d) shows the time when the eighth round is finished. Therefore, a character image “8R” is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative design display device 208 to indicate that the round is the eighth round.

  In the fifth to eighth rounds of the jackpot game, at least a predetermined number (for example, ten per game) of game balls or more are won in the variable winning opening 234. The number of winning balls based on winning a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 per round) to the variable winning opening 234 from the fifth round to the end of the eighth round is 600. For this reason, in the prize ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the total number of winning balls obtained by adding 600 to the total number of winning balls of 645 from the first round to the fourth round is 1245. A character image of “1245 GET” indicating that it is present is displayed.

  In this example, for example, in the fifth to eighth rounds of the jackpot game, a total of 44 game balls have won the variable winning opening 234. Therefore, when the eighth round is completed, “40” is stored as a value of the winning number included in the 4R winning number information in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the 4R surplus cumulative number included in the 4R surplus cumulative number information is stored. “4” is stored as a value.

  Prior to the start of the ninth round, which starts after the end of the eighth round and an interval time (for example, 2.5 s), for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command including the information that the ninth round is started transmitted from the main control unit 300 is the same as when the round designation command including the information on the fifth round start is received. 1st sub control part prize ball acquisition information generation processing at the time of receiving the round designation command is executed. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the jackpot game is a 16-round jackpot game, and the 4R winning number stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “40” and a predetermined number for four rounds. The 4R surplus accumulated number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is determined to be “4” and larger than 0, and the number of winning balls obtained based on the 4R surplus accumulated number is determined. In order to notify, the 4R surplus accumulated number information and the notification effect command are output to the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120, the 4R winning number information is cleared, and the 4R surplus accumulated information is cleared. The number information is cleared, and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command is terminated. The notification effect command based on the 4R surplus cumulative number information transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes, for example, information on the execution time of the notification effect.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 26E, a character image “↓↓↓↓ GET” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The voice “Puipy Puy” is emitted. Also, the ninth round is started. Therefore, a character image “9R” indicating that the round is the ninth round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (f) after the elapse of the effect shown in FIG. 26 (e), the number of winning balls obtained based on the 4R surplus cumulative number is “+60”. A character image “1305 GET” indicating the total number of winning balls acquired in the jackpot game, including the number of winning balls acquired based on the 4R surplus cumulative number, is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  The jackpot game is sequentially digested from the ninth round to the eleventh round, and FIG. 26 (g) shows the time when the twelfth round is completed. Therefore, a character image “12R” is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that the round is the 12th round.

  During the ninth to twelfth rounds of the jackpot game, at least a predetermined number (for example, ten per game) of game balls or more are won in the variable winning opening 234. The number of winning balls based on winning a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 per round) to the variable winning opening 234 from the ninth round to the twelfth round is 600. For this reason, in the prize ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the total number of winning balls obtained by adding 600 to the total number of 1305 winning balls from the fifth round to the eighth round is 1905. A character image of “1905 GET” indicating that it is present is displayed.

  In the ninth to twelfth rounds, a total of 42 game balls have won the variable prize opening 234. Therefore, when the twelfth round ends, “40” is stored as a value of the number of winnings included in the 4R winning number information in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the 4R surplus cumulative number included in the 4R surplus cumulative number information is stored. “2” is stored as a value.

  Prior to the start of the 13th round of the jackpot game, which is started after the end of the twelfth round of the jackpot game and the elapse of an interval time (for example, 2.5 s), for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command including the information that the 13th round is started transmitted from the main control unit 300 is the same as when the round designation command including the information on the fifth round start is received. 1st sub control part prize ball acquisition information generation processing at the time of receiving the round designation command is executed. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the jackpot game is a 16-round jackpot game, and determines that the 4R winning number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “40” and not less than 40. Then, the 4R surplus accumulated number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “2” and is determined to be larger than 0, and the 4R surplus accumulated number is notified in order to notify the winning ball acquisition number based on the 4R surplus accumulated number. The information and the notification effect command are output to the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120, the 4R winning number information is cleared, the 4R surplus accumulated number information is cleared, and the specific round The first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the designated command is terminated. The notification effect command based on the 4R surplus cumulative number information transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes, for example, information on the execution time of the notification effect.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 26 (h), a character image “↓↓↓↓ GET” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The voice “Puipy Puy” is emitted. Also, the 13th round is started. Therefore, a character image “13R” indicating that the round is the thirteenth round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (i) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the production shown in FIG. 26 (h) has started, “+30” indicating that the number of prize balls acquired based on the 4R surplus cumulative number is 30. A character image and a character image of “1935 GET” indicating the total number of winning balls acquired in the jackpot game including the number of winning balls based on the 4R surplus cumulative number are displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to collectively execute the surplus notification corresponding to the award ball acquisition information (the surplus award ball acquisition information) based on the surplus accumulated number every four rounds at the start of the next round. It is configured. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured not to notify the winning ball acquisition information every four rounds but to notify the winning ball acquisition information based on the surplus accumulated number up to that time at the start of any round. It may be.

  Next, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which prize ball acquisition information based on the surplus cumulative number is collectively reported based on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have not won at the variable prize opening 234. FIG. 27A to FIG. 27C show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In FIG. 27A to FIG. 27C, a character image “Big hit!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in order to notify that the big hit game is being played.

  FIG. 27A shows a point in time when the seventh round of the 16-round jackpot game has ended. Therefore, a character image “7R” is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that the round is the seventh round.

  In the first to sixth rounds of the jackpot game, at least a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) or more are won in the variable winning opening 234. For this reason, the number of winning balls based on winning a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 per round) to the variable winning opening 234 at the end of the sixth round is 900 (150 (1 round) No. of prize balls)) × 6 (number of rounds)).

  At the end of the sixth round, a total of 69 game balls have been won in the variable winning opening 234. Therefore, when the sixth round is completed, “9” is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 as the value of the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information.

  In this example, for example, in the seventh round, a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) that is the opening time of the variable prize opening 234 elapses before a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the variable prize opening 234. The closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established, and the variable winning opening 234 shifts to the closed state. A game ball has not won a prize in the variable prize slot 234 within the effective period after the variable prize slot 234 is closed. For this reason, the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 in the seventh round is nine, which is one less than a predetermined number (for example, 10). Therefore, when the seventh round is completed, “9” is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 as the value of the winning number included in the winning number information.

  The number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls (9) in the variable winning opening 234 in the seventh round is 135. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), a predetermined number (for example, 1) to the variable winning opening 234 from the first round to the seventh round is displayed in the winning ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A character image “1035” indicating that the number of winning balls obtained based on winning of 10 gaming balls per round is 1035 is displayed.

  Prior to the start of the eighth round that starts after the end of the seventh round of the jackpot game, the first sub-control unit 400 is transmitted from the main control unit 300. Receive a round specification command. When the first sub-control unit 400 having received the round designation command determines that the number of winnings stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “9” and smaller than 10, the round designation command shown in FIG. 14 is received. Instead of the first sub-control unit award ball acquisition information generation process, the first sub-control unit award ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command is executed as follows. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the surplus cumulative number stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “4” and greater than 0, and reduces the surplus cumulative number by 1 to reduce the surplus cumulative number. 8 is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and a notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information is output to the control board for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120. Then, the surplus cumulative number information is cleared, the winning number information is cleared, and the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit end command is ended. The notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes, for example, information on the execution time of the notification effect.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 27B, a character image “↓↓↓↓ GET” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The voice “Puipy Puy” is emitted. In addition, the eighth round is started. Therefore, a character image “8R” indicating that the round is the eighth round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The character “+120” indicating that the number of prize balls acquired based on the surplus cumulative number is 120 as shown in FIG. 27C after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect shown in FIG. 27B. An image and a character image “1155 GET” indicating the total number of winning balls acquired up to the seventh round of the jackpot game including the number of winning balls based on the surplus cumulative number are displayed in the effect display area 208d. .

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes winning information storage means (for example, RAM 408) for storing winning information (for example, surplus cumulative number information) related to winnings exceeding a predetermined number. Before the predetermined number of winnings, the open state is changed to the closed state (for example, “a predetermined time (25 s) has elapsed as“ variable winning port closing condition ””). When winning information is stored, it is possible to execute notification supplementing information related to the number of game balls less than a predetermined number (for example, the first sub-control unit at the time of receiving a round designation command) Steps S1203 to S1213, S1217 and S1219 of the prize ball acquisition information generation process).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the passage of a predetermined time in the open state as a condition for shifting the control state of the predetermined winning means from the open state to the closed state (for example, “variable prize opening closing condition” And “the predetermined time (25 s, 1 s, 0.4 s, 0.39 s has elapsed)”, and the control state is configured to shift from the open state to the closed state based on the previously established conditions. The prize-ball-acquisition information notifying means is configured to store a predetermined number (for example, based on storing the winning information of the surplus accumulated number information when the control state shifts from the open state to the closed state as the predetermined time elapses) The amount of less than 10) is supplemented to notify the winning ball acquisition information (for example, step S1203 to step S1201 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation processing when the round designation command is received) 213, S1217 and Step S1219) is configured as.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes winning information storage means (for example, RAM 408) for storing winning information (excess cumulative number information) regarding winnings exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10), and winning ball acquisition information notifying means. When the predetermined winning means is changed from the open state to the closed state before the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the predetermined winning means, the winning information is stored in the winning information storage means. If it is, the winning ball acquisition information based on all the winning information is notified (for example, a modification of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 27) (for example, the first sub control unit award when the round designation command is received) Step S1203 to steps S1213, S1217 and step S1219 of the sphere acquisition information generation process are configured.

  For example, if a closing condition such as the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) different from the closing condition based on winning of a predetermined number of game balls before a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins, There are cases where a predetermined number of balls have not won. In such a case, if the winning ball winning information based on the number of winning game balls exceeding the predetermined number is not notified, the winning number of gaming balls that is less than the predetermined number (for example, 10) There is a possibility that the award ball acquisition information corresponding to is notified. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, when the winning information storage means stores the winning information of the game balls exceeding the predetermined number, the winnings exceeding the predetermined number that are scheduled to be notified collectively. In some cases, the player's dissatisfaction can be resolved by making up for the shortage based on the winning ball acquisition information based on the information and notifying the winning ball acquisition information corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning game balls.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to notify the winning ball acquisition number based on the surplus accumulated number when the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is a lapse of a predetermined time (25 s). Also good.

  Next, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, even when less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the variable prize opening 234, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the variable prize opening 234. An example of notifying the number of winning balls based on the number and notifying the original number of winning balls after the big hit game will be described. FIG. 28A to FIG. 28D show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B, a character image “Big hit!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in order to notify that the big hit game is being played. .

  FIG. 28A shows, for example, the time when the fourth round in the 16-round jackpot game related to “Special Figure A” has ended. Therefore, a character image “4R” is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that the round is the fourth round.

  In this example, for example, at the time when the fourth round of the big hit game ends, a total of 39 game balls, which are one less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round), have won a prize at the variable winning opening 234. . For this reason, at the end of the fourth round, the number of winning balls based on winning a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) of game balls to the variable winning opening 234 is 15 less than the predetermined number of 600. There are 585. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 is insufficient, a predetermined number (for example, 1) to the variable winning opening 234 regardless of the shortage. The number of winning balls is notified when there are 10 winning game balls per round. Therefore, a character image “600 GET” indicating that the number of winning balls is 600 is displayed in the winning ball winning number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub-control unit 400 has received less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls in the variable prize opening 234 in one round, that is, the variable prize slot 234 in one round. If it is determined that the number of winning game balls is insufficient, the shortage amount is added to the shortage cumulative number included in the shortage cumulative number information, and the shortage cumulative number after addition is stored again in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. . Therefore, in this example, when the fourth round is completed, “1” is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 as the value of the insufficient cumulative number included in the insufficient cumulative number information.

  The jackpot game progresses sequentially from the 5th round to the 16th round, and at the 5th round to the 16th round, at least a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) or more of the game balls are placed in the variable winning opening 234. Winning a prize.

  FIG. 28 (d) shows a point in time when the 16th round of the jackpot game has ended. Therefore, a character image “16R” is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that the round is the sixteenth round.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a variable prize opening 234 that is relatively easy to win over. For this reason, there are cases where a game ball has won a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) in the variable winning opening 234 before the 16th round, which is the final round of the jackpot, ends. is there. In this embodiment, for example, a total of nine game balls have won over at the end of the 16th round. Therefore, when the sixteenth round is completed, “9” is stored as the value of the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  Prior to the end of the jackpot game, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the jackpot end command transmitted from the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the jackpot end command executes, for example, the following process in place of the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the shortage cumulative number is “1” and is greater than 0, determines that the surplus cumulative number is “9” and is greater than 0, and sets the value of the surplus cumulative number to 1 The surplus accumulated number value “8” is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and a notification effect command based on the surplus accumulated number information is controlled by the control board and the speaker 120 for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208. Is output to the tone generator IC 416 for clearing, the surplus cumulative number information is cleared, the insufficient cumulative number information is cleared, and the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation processing at the time of receiving the jackpot end command is terminated. The notification effect command based on the surplus cumulative number information transmitted to the control board and the sound source IC 416 includes, for example, information on the execution time of the notification effect.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 28C, a character image “↓↓↓↓ GET” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The voice “Puipy Puy” is emitted. Characters “+120” indicating that the number of prize balls acquired based on the surplus cumulative number is 120 as shown in FIG. 28 (d) after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the effect shown in FIG. 28 (c). An image and a character image “2520 GET” indicating the total number of winning balls acquired in the jackpot game, including the number of winning balls based on the surplus accumulated number, are displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  In addition, the game state of the next special figure variable game started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the jackpot game related to “Special Figure A” shifts to the special figure certain change state. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control for displaying a character image “next probability change!” Below the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 notifies that the game state of the next special figure variable game shifts to the special figure certain change state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the notifying means stores no winning information in the winning information storage means when the game ball is switched from the open state to the closed state before a predetermined number of game balls are won in the winning means. In this case, when winning information is stored, it is possible to execute a notification supplementing information related to the number of game balls less than the predetermined number (for example, when receiving a variable winning opening winning command) Steps S1101, S1105 to S1111 and S1115 of the 1 sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process).

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the predetermined winning means is changed from the open state to the closed state before the prize ball acquisition information notifying means wins a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the predetermined winning means. Sometimes, if the winning information of the surplus cumulative number information is not stored in the winning information storage means, the prize is compensated for less than a predetermined number (for example, ten) based on the storing of the winning information. It is configured to notify the ball acquisition information (for example, steps S1101, S1105 to S1111 and S1115 of the first sub-control unit award ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning award winning command).

  When the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration stores the winning information of the game balls exceeding the predetermined number, the number of gaming balls less than the predetermined number is compensated and notified from the winning information, so that the predetermined number of gaming balls When the number of winning prizes is insufficient, it may be possible to prevent notification of winning ball acquisition information including a lack of winning balls. Further, the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration compensates for the award ball acquisition information of less than a predetermined number based on the memorized winning information, so that the award can be achieved while eliminating or reducing the dissatisfaction of the player. In some cases, it is possible to prevent excessive notification of the ball acquisition information and to avoid the danger of notifying the player of the prize ball acquisition information of excessive notification content.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of prize balls obtained based on winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the round variable prize winning opening 234 may be easily understood at the first hit. Yes, the player's stress may be alleviated.

  Next, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which an effect of notifying over-winning is executed every time one game ball is over-winning. FIG. 29A to FIG. 29C show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Also, FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (c) show a state immediately before the end of two rounds of the big hit game. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 29A to 29C, a character image “2R” indicating that the round is the second round is displayed in the round display area 810 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes.

  In this example, for example, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have won in the variable winning opening 234 in the first round, and in the second round, the variable winning opening has already been made at the time shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in 234. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (c), the prize ball acquisition number display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a prize ball number of 15 (the number of prize balls for winning one game ball). ) × 10 (the number of winning game balls) × 2 (number of rounds) = 300 (pieces), a character image “300 GET” is displayed.

  In the second round, the eleventh game ball is awarded to the variable winning opening 234 in the second round from the time when the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234 is established until the closing state is reached. Yes, the first over-winning will occur. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the variable winning-port winning command based on the detection of the first over winning by the various sensors 320 receives the first sub-control unit prize when receiving the variable winning-port winning command shown in FIG. For example, the following processing is executed instead of the ball acquisition information generation processing. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the number of winnings stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “10” and is not smaller than 10, increases the surplus number by 1, and increases the surplus number after increase. The control board and the speaker for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 with the notification effect command based on the surplus number information in order to store the value “1” in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and notify the first overwinning. The sound is output to the sound source IC 416 for controlling 120. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), an image showing a state in which “Yoshimune” raises his left arm and only the index finger of his left hand extends upward is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the over winning is 1 It is notified that there was a piece. At the same time, a sound “picone” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  Within the effective period of the second round, following the first overwinning, the second overwinning occurs in the twelfth winning in the variable winning opening 234 in the second round. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the variable winning opening winning command based on the detection of the second over winning by the various sensors 320 executes, for example, substantially the same processing as the first. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the number of winnings stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “10” and is not smaller than 10, increases the surplus number by 1, and increases the surplus number after increase. The control board and speaker for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the notification effect command based on the surplus number information in order to store the value “2” in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and notify the second overwinning. The sound is output to the sound source IC 416 for controlling 120. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), an image showing a state in which “Yoshimune” protrudes the right arm all the way and the index finger and middle finger of the right hand are extended upward is displayed in the effect display area 208d. It is notified that there were two over winnings. At the same time, a sound “picone” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  Within the effective period of the second round, following the second over-winning, the third over-winning occurs in the 13th winning through the variable winning opening 234 in the second round. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the variable winning award winning command based on the detection of the third over winning by the various sensors 320 executes, for example, substantially the same processing as the first and second. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the number of winnings stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 is “10” and is not smaller than 10, increases the surplus number by 1, and increases the surplus number after increase. The control board and speaker for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the notification effect command based on the surplus number information in order to store the value “3” in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and notify the third overwinning. The sound is output to the sound source IC 416 for controlling 120. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29 (c), an image showing a state in which “Yoshimune” protrudes the right arm all the way and the index finger, middle finger and ring finger of the right hand are extended upward is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Then, it is notified that there were three over winnings. At the same time, a sound “picone” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when there are more than a predetermined number of winnings in the open state of the winning means, notification of only the winnings (for example, an image representing “Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 29) A notification effect with a predetermined sound) can be executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with surplus winning notification means for notifying only the winning when there are more than a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls when the variable winning opening 234 is opened. Yes. According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the player can recognize the winning when the winning occurs when the winning of gaming balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10) has been won. In some cases, a special game (winning game) can be digested while expecting the number of prize balls that have been obtained together.

  Further, even if the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 234 is a notification mode that can be recognized by the player, as long as it does not directly notify the number of winning balls as in the case of winning ball acquisition information notification means. It is included in notifying only the winning.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment notifies only the winning when the winning means exceeds the predetermined number (for example, 10) in the open state of the winning means (for example, “Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 29). Surplus prize notification means (for example, a speaker 120 and a decorative symbol display device 208) for providing an image and a predetermined sound for notification) is provided.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize that the winning of the game ball exceeding the predetermined number is recognized when the winning occurs, In some cases, special games (winning games) can be digested while expecting when the prize ball acquisition information obtained in a collective manner will be notified.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute an effect of notifying over winning every time there is an over winning of a game ball. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a common sound emitted from the speaker 120, but may be configured to be able to perform over-winning notification by an effect in which a predetermined sound different for each over-winning is emitted. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that an image associated with every over winning of the game ball is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but there is no relevance for each over winning. You may be comprised so that the effect which displays an image with the decorative design display apparatus 208 and alert | reports an overwinning may be performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 can change the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby providing an effect of notifying over-winning in an arbitrary combination using the speaker 120 and the decorative symbol display device 208.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above, it is possible to notify the player of the number of game balls over won by a predetermined number of notification effects, and the total execution time of the predetermined notification effects is also increased. There are cases where interest can be improved. For example, when a predetermined notification effect is executed using the speaker 120, the same sound is repeatedly emitted in a short period of time, and when the predetermined notification effect is executed using the decorative symbol display device 208, an over-winning game Depending on the number of balls, the display time of the display image in the effect may change, and it may be possible to effectively produce that there have been multiple overwins.

  Next, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this embodiment, during the power support state, the number of winning balls in the previous jackpot game is notified, and at the end of the short time, the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls acquired based on the surplus cumulative number in the previous jackpot game are included. An example in which the total number of winning balls is notified will be described. FIG. 30A to FIG. 30H show, in this order, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  In FIG. 30 (a), the 16-round jackpot game is completed, and the number of winning balls based on the surplus cumulative number and the total number of winning balls in the jackpot game including the number of winning balls are reported. Indicates the state. In the jackpot game, a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more of game balls have won at least the variable prize opening 234 in all rounds of the first round to the sixteenth round. In this example, for example, a total of nine game balls have been won in the jackpot game exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) in the variable prize opening 234. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30A, since the surplus cumulative number is “9” in the jackpot game, the character image “+135” indicating the number of winning balls acquired based on the surplus cumulative number “9”. In addition, a character image “2535 GET” indicating the total number of winning balls in the jackpot game including the number of winning balls acquired based on the surplus cumulative number is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  In addition, the game state of the next special figure variable game that is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the big hit game shifts to the special figure certain change state. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control for displaying a character image “next probability change!” Below the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 notifies the player that the game state of the next special figure variable game is shifted to the special figure certain change state.

  At the time when the big hit game ends, one special figure 1 variable game is held, and four special figure 2 variable games are held. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game related to the special figure 2 start information acquired first after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the jackpot game, for example, the following processing is executed. The main control unit 300 acquires the special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure 2 variable game starts from now. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the data is retained one by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, in this process, the main control unit 300 obtains a special figure timer number determination random value, determines a special figure timer number as a fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game, and determines whether or not the result is a success / failure determination result and the special figure timer number. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, the determination result is 16R big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special drawing D”).

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward bold arrows in the drawing. The symbol variation display that moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image b4 is deleted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), since one special figure 1 variable game is held, the special figure held first in the special figure 1 holding display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A hold display image a1 corresponding to one variable game is displayed to notify the player that one special figure 1 variable game is held. In addition, since three special figure 2 variable games are reserved, the special figure 2 variable display game 208 d2 of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to the special figure 2 variable games reserved for the first to the third. The hold display images b1 to b3 to be displayed are displayed, and the player is informed that a total of three special figure 2 variable games are being held.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays the total number of winning balls in the previous big hit game in the winning ball number display area 800 during the special figure variable game when the game state is the special figure probability changing state. It has become. In this embodiment, the winning ball acquisition number display area 800 is configured to be arranged on the upper left side in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 30B, a character image “2535 GET” indicating the total number of winning balls in the previous big hit game is displayed in the winning ball acquisition number display area 800.

  In addition, during the special figure 2 variable game, the gaming state is in a special figure certain change state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30B and FIG. 30C described later, a character image “probability change” is displayed on the upper right side in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 informs the player that the gaming state is the special figure certain change state.

  During the special figure 2 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 2 starting port 232, and one special figure 2 variable game is newly held. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 30C, the hold display image b4 corresponding to the special figure 2 variable game held on the fourth is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The player is informed that a total of four special figure 2 variable games are on hold.

  In the winning ball acquisition number displayed in the winning ball acquisition number display area 800, only the winning ball acquisition number based on the winning of the game ball of the variable winning port 234 is displayed, and the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the special figure 2 starting port are displayed. The number of winning balls based on winning of game balls to H.232 or general winning opening 226 is not included. For this reason, the number of winning balls displayed in the winning ball acquisition number display area 800 does not change during the special figure probability changing state that is not in the big hit game.

  The special figure 2 variable game is selected as "Special figure D". For this reason, although not shown in the figure, “Special Figure D” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 2 variable game. 208a, 208b and 208c are stopped and displayed as “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, and the player is informed that the special figure 2 variable game has been won in 16 rounds.

  In the jackpot game of the “Special Figure D”, at least a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more game balls have won in all rounds from the first round to the 16th round. In addition, the number of winning game balls that exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the first round to the sixteenth round of the jackpot game is 8 in total. Therefore, “8” is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 as the value of the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information.

  When the jackpot game ends, the number of winning balls based on winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 160 for 16R jackpot game) is notified to the variable winning opening in the jackpot game. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 30D, a character image “2400 GET” indicating the number of winning balls is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines that the current game state is a special figure high probability state, the winning ball acquisition number based on the surplus accumulated number is not displayed in the effect display area 208d after the big hit game is over. Yes.

  Also, since the jackpot game that has been completed is based on the jackpot of “Special Figure D”, the game state shifts to the special figure low-probability normal figure high-probability state from the next time to the special figure variation game 100 times ahead. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character image “100 times the next time!” Below the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board to display the decorative symbol display device 208. To control. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 notifies the player that the gaming state will shift to the short-time state from the next time to the special figure variation game 100 times ahead.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game related to the special figure 2 start information acquired first after the lapse of a predetermined time after the big bonus game of "Special figure D" ends, for example, the following processing Is executed. The main control unit 300 acquires the special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure 2 variable game starts from now. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the data is retained one by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, in this process, the main control unit 300 obtains a special figure timer number determination random value, determines a special figure timer number as a fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game, and determines whether or not the result is a success / failure determination result and the special figure timer number. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 30 (e), a decorative symbol is displayed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by a bold arrow pointing downward in the drawing. The symbol variation display that moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image b4 is deleted.

  In addition, since the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game has not changed, the hold display image corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. a1 is displayed, and the player is informed that one special figure 1 variable game is on hold.

  When the gaming state is in the short-time state, the first sub-control unit 400 informs the player that the gaming state is in the short-time state and the remaining number of short-time times excluding the special figure variable game. The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled via the control board for notification. As a result, as shown in FIG. 30 (e), a character image “short time! 99 remaining times” is displayed above the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, during the special figure changing game when the game state is the short time state, the winning ball acquisition number display area 800 is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 30 (e) and FIG. 30 (f), which will be described later, in the winning ball acquisition number display area 800, a predetermined number (for example, 160 for 16R jackpot game) to the variable winning opening 234 in the previous jackpot game. A character image “2400 GET” indicating the number of winning balls acquired based on the winning of gaming balls is displayed.

  Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, it is easy to advance the game without digesting the special figure 1 variation game during the time-short state. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 30 (f), during the last special figure 2 variable game in the short-time state, the number of special figure 1 variable games held does not change and one special figure 1 variable game is held. Therefore, in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1, a hold display image a1 corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game is displayed.

  During the special figure 2 variable game, one game ball is won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, and a total of four special figure 2 variable games including the prize are held. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 30 (f), in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2, hold display images b1 to b4 respectively corresponding to the special figure 2 variable games held in the first to fourth pieces. Is displayed.

  For example, in this example, all of the special figure 2 variable games from the first time to the 99th time in the short time state are out of place. When the last special figure 2 variable game in the short time state is started and the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the game state is in the short time state and that the special figure variable game is When finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled via the control board in order to notify the player that the time saving state is finished. As a result, as shown in FIG. 30 (f), a character image “Last time! Last” is displayed above the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (g), in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 2 variable game, "decoration 2-decoration 7- Decoration 3 "is stopped and displayed. This notifies the player that the special figure 2 variable game is out of play.

  Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is finished, the time saving state is also finished. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 via the control board in order to notify the player that the time reduction state has ended. As a result, as shown in FIG. 30 (h), a character image “short time end” is displayed above the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 notifies the player that the time-short state has been completed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the short-time state is completed, all winning balls obtained in the big hit game executed when the win is made in the special figure variable game from the first time to the 100th time in the short-time state. The number of winning balls acquired in the previous jackpot game prior to the short-running state, the number of winning balls based on the surplus cumulative number, and the number of all playing balls Separately notify the number of winning balls based on winning. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 30 (h), a character image “+120” indicating the number of winning balls acquired based on winning of game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 160 per 16R jackpot) in the variable winning opening 234. In addition, a character image “TOTAL 2520 GET” indicating the total number of winning balls of 2520 based on all the game balls won in the variable winning opening 234 from the last big hit game to the end of the short time is displayed in the effect display area.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 clears the accumulated prize ball acquisition information stored in the RAM 408 at the start of the special figure variable game where the time reduction ends and both the normal probability fluctuation flag and the time reduction flag are turned off. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to notify the player of the total number of winning balls in the previous big hit game during the special figure variable game when the game state is the special figure probability changing state. Has been. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the time-short state is completed, all the prizes obtained in the big hit game executed when it is a win in the special figure variable game from the first time to the 100th time in the time-short state. Dividing the number of winning balls based on the cumulative number of surpluses and the number of winning balls based on winnings of all game balls from the number of winning balls acquired in the previous jackpot game before the short-term state. And informing the player. According to the pachinko machine 100 having these configurations, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the winning means is in an open state during a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the notification means is capable of executing surplus notification at the end of the special game state (for example, Step S1403) of the first sub control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit end command.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment notifies the surplus winning ball acquisition information based on winnings exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) when the special game state is ended by the winning ball acquisition information notification means (for example, a big hit) Step S1403) of the first sub control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the end command is configured.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the prize ball acquisition information of the prize balls based on the winning of the game balls exceeding the predetermined number at the end of the special game state is collectively notified, the prize ball acquisition information is accurately In some cases, notification can be made. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the winning ball acquisition information based on winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 per round) by the player at the first big hit (so-called first hit). Can be recognized. The special game state may include a short-time state or a special figure high-accuracy state. Further, the special figure high probability state includes a latent probability change, but it is more preferable that the special support state is an electric support state in which the number of game balls is difficult to decrease.

  Next, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the number of winning prizes is notified as the winning ball acquisition information instead of the number of winning balls. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a winning number information command including the winning number instead of the winning ball acquisition information command in step S1115, and the winning number instead of the winning ball acquisition information in step S1405. It is configured to store the winning prize number information including it in the RAM 408. FIG. 31A to FIG. 31J show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Further, since this embodiment is the same as the special figure disguise game in Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 20, detailed description of the same processing and effects will be omitted.

  In FIG. 31A, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure variable game is won as the 16R special big hit (probable big hit). It has been reported. Although not shown, “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1, a hold display image a1 is displayed to notify that one special figure 1 variable game is held.

  Prior to the start of the jackpot game started after the end of the notification effect indicating that the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 31A is a jackpot, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot start command shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the special figure A to special figure F flag values stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, respectively, and the special figure A flag value is “1” and the jackpot game. Is determined to be a big hit game of “special drawing A” (Yes in step S1001), and a winning ball acquisition information command is transmitted to a control board (not shown) that controls the decorative symbol display device 208 (step S1003). The first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit start command is terminated.

  When the above processing is completed, a character image indicating the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed in a winning ball winning number display area 800 provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time shown in FIG. 31 (a), for example, it is the first hit of the pachinko machine 100, and the accumulated number of awarded winning balls is 0. Therefore, the awarded number of winning balls display area 800 indicates that the accumulated number of earned winning balls is 0. A character image “0GET” is displayed. In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the player that the jackpot game has started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), a character image “Big hit!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the first round, a total of 11 game balls have won the variable prize opening 234 by exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10) by one. For this reason, at the end of the first round, the winning number included in the winning number information is “10”, the surplus number included in the surplus number information is “1”, and the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information. Is “1”.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command including the information on the start of the second round transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command. . In the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs substantially the same processing as when the round designation command including the second round start information in the first embodiment is received, and refers to the notification effect list table shown in FIG. Then, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A”, the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (ten)”, and the “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “ “1”, and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”, so that “the effect C” is selected as the “predetermined notification effect” and the control board and the speaker 120 for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208. A sound effect command for executing “effect C” as a predetermined sound effect based on the surplus number information and the closing condition flag is output to the sound source IC 416 for performing control (step S1219). As a result, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), “effect C” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, and a sound “Jackin” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the number of winning game balls in excess of a predetermined number is not notified during the big hit game. The pachinko machine 100 is configured to notify the number of winning prizes, not the number of winning balls. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), at the start of the second round, the winning number display area 820 provided on the upper right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the first round. A character image “10GET” indicating the number of winning game balls of a predetermined number (for example, 10) is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, only the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 is displayed in the winning display area 820, and the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, and the like. The number of winning game balls to the winning opening 226 is not displayed.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, the first sub-control unit prize at the time of receiving the variable prize slot prize command shown in FIG. 13 is based on the fact that the first game ball in the second round has won the variable prize slot 234. A process substantially similar to the ball acquisition information generation process is executed. In this example, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a winning number information command including a winning number to the control board that controls the decorative symbol display device 208 in step S1115. As a result, as shown in FIG. 31 (d), the winning number display area 820 is referred to as “11 GET” indicating eleven that is obtained by adding the first winning number in the round to the winning number in the first round. A character image is displayed.

  In the second round, for example, 10 game balls are won within the opening time of the variable winning opening 234, and, for example, 3 or more game balls are won within the effective period thereafter. For this reason, at the time of the end of the second round and the start of the third round, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), “effect Y (specific)” is executed in the effect display area 208d as a predetermined notification effect, and a prize is won. In the number display area 820, a character image “20GET” indicating the number of winning game balls within a predetermined number (for example, 10) to the variable winning opening 234 in the first round and the second round is displayed.

  Thereafter, the game is executed sequentially from the third round to the fifteenth round, and at the start of the sixteenth round, as shown in FIG. 31 (f), the winning prize display area 820 is displayed in the variable prize opening in the first to fifteenth rounds. A character image “150 GET” indicating the number of winning game balls within a predetermined number (for example, 10) to 234 is displayed.

  In the 16th round, for example, 10 game balls have won a prize within the opening time of the variable prize opening 234 (for example, 25 s). For this reason, when the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 31 (g), a predetermined number (for example, every round) to the variable winning opening 234 in the 1st to 16th rounds is displayed in the winning number display area 820. A character image “160 GET” indicating the number of winning game balls within 10) is displayed.

  In the jackpot game, a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more game balls have won a prize in the variable winning opening 234 in all the rounds from the first round to the sixteenth round. In addition, the total number of winning game balls that exceed a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) in the variable winning opening 234 in the first round to the 16th round, that is, the surplus cumulative number in the jackpot game is There are 15 pieces.

  As with the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment receives the jackpot end command, it first executes the process shown in FIG. 14 and then executes the process shown in FIG. Yes. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 31 (g), for example, “effect D” is executed as the predetermined notification effect, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “effect D” was executed, a predetermined number ( For example, a notification effect indicating that there are more than 160 game balls won is started. As shown in FIG. 31 (h), a character image of “over winning ↓↓↓↓ GET” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the voice “Puipyupui” is output from the speaker 120. Is emitted. As shown in FIG. 31 (i) after the elapse of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (h), the character “+15 extra!” Is shown to indicate that the surplus cumulative number in the jackpot game is 15. An image and a character image “175 GET” indicating the total number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 in the jackpot game including the surplus cumulative number are displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  Further, since the ended big hit game is based on the big hit of “Special Figure A”, the game state of the special figure variable game shifts to the special figure certain change state from the next time. For this reason, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control for displaying a character image “next probability change!” Below the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 informs the player that the game state of the next special figure variable game will shift to the special figure certain change state.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (j), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the big hit game, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are indicated by thick arrows pointing downward in the drawing. As shown, the symbol variation display in which the decorative symbol moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Next, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a winning number information command including the winning number in addition to the winning ball acquisition information command in step S1115, and in step S1405, the winning ball information is added to the winning ball acquisition information. The winning number information including the number is configured to be stored in the RAM 408. In the present embodiment, an example in which the number of winning balls and the number of winning prizes are notified as winning ball acquisition information will be described. FIG. 32A to FIG. 32J show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Further, since this embodiment is the same as the special figure disguise game in Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 20, detailed description of the same processing and effects will be omitted.

  In FIG. 32A, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure variable game is won as the 16R special big hit (probable big hit). It has been reported. Although not shown, “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1, a hold display image a1 is displayed to notify that one special figure 1 variable game is held.

  Prior to the start of the jackpot game started after the end of the notification effect indicating that the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 32A is a jackpot, for example, the following processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot start command shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the special figure A to special figure F flag values stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, respectively, and the special figure A flag value is “1” and the jackpot game. Is determined to be a big hit game of “special drawing A” (Yes in step S1001), and a winning ball acquisition information command is transmitted to a control board (not shown) that controls the decorative symbol display device 208 (step S1003). The first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit start command is terminated.

  When the above processing is completed, a character image indicating the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed in a winning ball winning number display area 800 provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time shown in FIG. 32 (a), for example, it is the first hit of the pachinko machine 100, and the accumulated prize ball acquisition number is 0, so the prize ball acquisition number display area 800 indicates that the accumulated prize ball acquisition number is 0. A character image “0GET” is displayed. In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the player that the jackpot game has started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 32B, a character image “Big hit!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the first round, a total of 11 game balls have won the variable prize opening 234 by exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10) by one. For this reason, at the end of the first round, the winning number included in the winning number information is “10”, the surplus number included in the surplus number information is “1”, and the surplus cumulative number included in the surplus cumulative number information. Is “1”.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the round designation command including the information on the start of the second round transmitted from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command. . In the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs substantially the same processing as when the round designation command including the second round start information in the first embodiment is received, and refers to the notification effect list table shown in FIG. Then, the “special drawing type” is “special drawing A”, the “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (ten)”, and the “number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is “ “1”, and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”, so that “the effect C” is selected as the “predetermined notification effect” and the control board and the speaker 120 for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208. A sound effect command for executing “effect C” as a predetermined sound effect based on the surplus number information and the closing condition flag is output to the sound source IC 416 for performing control (step S1219). As a result, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), “effect C” is executed as a predetermined notification effect, and a sound “Jackin” is emitted from the speaker 120.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the number of game balls won in excess of a predetermined number and the number of winning balls based on the number of wins are not notified during the big hit game. The pachinko machine 100 is configured to notify the number of winning balls and the number of winning prizes. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the winning ball number acquisition display area 800 is arranged on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game, and the number of winnings is displayed on the upper left side of the effect display area 208d. A region 820 is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), at the start of the second round, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls in the first round are displayed in the winning number display area 820 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A character image “Win 10” indicating the number is displayed, and a character image “150 GET” indicating the number of winning balls based on the winning number is displayed in the winning ball acquisition number display area 800.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, only the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 234 is displayed in the winning display area 820, and the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, and the general winning prize are displayed. The number of winning game balls to the mouth 226 is not displayed. Also, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, only the number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 is displayed in the winning ball display area 800, The number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls to the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the general winning port 226 is not displayed.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, based on the fact that the first game ball in the second round has won the variable prize opening 234, the first sub control unit at the time of receiving the variable prize slot prize command shown in FIG. A process substantially similar to the winning ball acquisition information generation process is executed. In this example, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a winning ball acquisition information command and a winning number information command including a winning number to the control board that controls the decorative symbol display device 208 in step S1115. ing. As a result, as shown in FIG. 31 (d), in the winning number display area 820, "winning 11" indicating 11 which is obtained by adding the first winning number in the round to the winning number in the first round. Is displayed, and a prize ball acquisition number display area 800 indicates 165 prize ball acquisition numbers obtained by adding 15 prize ball acquisition numbers based on the winnings to 150 prize ball acquisition numbers in the first round. A character image “165 GET” is displayed.

  In the second round, for example, 10 game balls are won within the opening time of the variable winning opening 234, and, for example, 3 or more game balls are won within the effective period thereafter. Therefore, at the start of the third round after the end of the second round, as shown in FIG. 32 (e), “effect Y (specific)” is executed in the effect display area 208d as a predetermined notification effect, and a prize is won. In the number display area 820, a character image “winning 20” indicating the number of winning game balls within a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) to the variable winning opening 234 in the first round and the second round is displayed. In the winning ball acquisition number display area 800, a character image “300 GET” indicating the winning ball acquisition number based on the winning number is displayed.

  Thereafter, the process is sequentially executed from the third round to the fifteenth round. At the start of the sixteenth round, as shown in FIG. 32 (f), the variable prize opening in the first round to the fifteenth round is displayed in the winning number display area 820. A character image of “winning 150” indicating the number of winning game balls within a predetermined number (for example, 10) to 234 is displayed, and the winning ball winning number display area 800 shows the winning ball winning number based on the winning number. A character image “2250 GET” is displayed.

  In the 16th round, for example, 10 game balls have won a prize within the opening time of the variable prize opening 234 (for example, 25 s). For this reason, when the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 32 (g), a predetermined number (for example, every round) to the variable winning opening 234 in the 1st to 16th rounds is displayed in the winning number display area 820. A character image “Win 160” indicating the number of winning game balls within 10) is displayed. In the winning ball display area 800, characters “2400 GET” indicating the winning ball based on the winning number are displayed. The

  In the jackpot game, a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more game balls have won a prize in the variable winning opening 234 in all the rounds from the first round to the sixteenth round. In addition, the total number of winning game balls that exceed a predetermined number (for example, 10 per round) in the variable winning opening 234 in the first round to the 16th round, that is, the surplus cumulative number in the jackpot game is There are 15 pieces.

  As with the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment receives the jackpot end command, it first executes the process shown in FIG. 14 and then executes the process shown in FIG. Yes. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 32 (g), for example, “effect D” is executed as the predetermined notification effect, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “effect D” was executed, a predetermined number ( For example, a notification effect indicating that there are more than 160 game balls won is started. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 32 (h), a character image of “over winning ↓↓↓↓ GET” is displayed at the approximate center in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the speaker 120 displays “Puipy Puy. Is uttered. As shown in FIG. 32 (i) after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the effect shown in FIG. 32 (h), the surplus cumulative number in the jackpot game is 15 and based on the surplus cumulative number. A character image “Add 15 wins, 225” indicating that the number of winning balls is 225, and the total number of winning balls based on winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening 234 in the jackpot game. A character image “TOTAL2625GET” is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has all the winning balls based on the number of over winnings in the previous jackpot game and the winning of the game ball to the variable winning port 234 during the special figure variable game started after the end of the jackpot game. The acquired number is displayed above the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (j), a character image “+15” indicating the surplus cumulative number is displayed on the upper left side of the effect display area 208d, and the prize ball is displayed on the upper right side of the effect display area 208d. A character image “2625” indicating the acquired number is displayed.

  Next, a modified example of the game board of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 33 is a schematic front view of the game board 900 according to this modification as seen from the front. Further, the same constituent elements as those of the game board 200 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the game board 900 of this modification is called a big prize opening or an attacker, and constitutes a winning means, and has a variable prize opening 234 disposed below the center. In addition, the game board 900 of this modification is called a big prize opening or an attacker and constitutes a winning means, and has a variable prize opening 235 disposed on the upper right of the variable prize opening 234. The variable winning opening 235 is provided in a shutter-type winning device (winning means) 700 that allows winning of a game ball through a rightward downflow path of the game area 124. The shutter-type winning device 700 includes a shutter that can be moved in and out of the variable winning opening 235. When the shutter appears, the ball cannot be entered (the shutter is closed). When the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol (for example, the special figure A shown in FIG. 5A), the shutter has a predetermined time interval (for example, the opening time is 25 seconds, the closing time is 1.0 second), Appearing and leaving (shutter opened) are repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The variable winning opening 235 provided with the shutter type winning apparatus 700 and provided at the lower right of the game board 200 generally has a higher ball entry rate than the variable winning opening 234 below the center of the game board and is excellent in digestion efficiency in the big hit game. Yes. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  On the other hand, the shutter-type winning device 700 is disposed below the right-handed downflow path. For this reason, during a big hit game, the player makes a right strike (how to make a game ball fly through the space between the top of the production device 206 and the outer rail 202 to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200) If the game ball does not fly along the path, the game ball is not won in the variable winning port 235 of the shutter-type winning device 700.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification includes variable winning holes 234 and 235 that are changed from a closed state to an open state in accordance with the transition to the special gaming state (winning game). Based on this, a predetermined notification effect is executed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification may be configured to execute a predetermined notification effect based on the winning of a game ball in the variable winning opening 235.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this modification includes a plurality of winning means (for example, variable winning ports 234, 235) that change from a closed state to an open state in accordance with the transition to the special gaming state (winning game), and the plurality of winnings. A predetermined notification effect is executed based on a winning of a game ball to a predetermined winning means (for example, variable winning opening 234) among the means.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 25 again.
(1-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
A gaming machine equipped with a winning means (for example, a variable winning port 234),
Predetermined notification (for example, notification effects shown in FIGS. 18 and 19) when a game ball wins the winning means during a closed state that starts after the open state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 25 s, 1 s) It is characterized by being executable.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the player may be interested in winning the game ball while the winning means is closed. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the dissatisfaction of the player with respect to the fact that a prescribed number (predetermined number, for example, 10) of game balls has not won may be solved by a predetermined notification.

(1-2) The pachinko machine 100,
The predetermined notification can be executed when a predetermined condition relating to the number of winning game balls (for example, winning in the variable winning port 234 after shifting to the closed state) is achieved.

  For example, when the winning means shifts from the open state to the closed state after a lapse of a predetermined time, a prescribed number (predetermined number, for example, 10) of game balls is not in a state of winning, but after that, There are cases where a predetermined number (a predetermined number, for example, 10) is reached by winning. According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it is possible to notify that a predetermined number of game balls have been won by performing a predetermined notification in such a case, so that the dissatisfaction of the player may be reduced. Further, the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration can improve the interest of the game because the predetermined notification can be executed even when the number of winning game balls exceeds a predetermined number (predetermined number, for example, 10). There are cases where it is possible.

(1-3) The pachinko machine 100,
The winning means changes from the open state to the closed state even when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins,
The predetermined notification can be executed when the predetermined number of game balls are won in the winning means during a closed state that is started after the open state is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 25 s, 1 s). It is characterized by being.

  The pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration can execute a predetermined notification when the number of winning game balls to the winning means exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10). May be able to improve.

(1-4) The pachinko machine 100,
The predetermined notification can be executed when a game ball wins the winning means in a closed state that starts after the predetermined number of game balls win the winning means (for example, FIG. 18). When “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10) winnings”, “production C” can be executed as “predetermined notification”)
It is characterized by.

  The pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration can execute a predetermined notification when the number of winning game balls to the winning means exceeds a predetermined number, so that the interest of the player can be improved. There is a case.

(1-5) The pachinko machine 100,
Depending on the number of game balls won in excess of the predetermined number, the content of the predetermined notification is varied (for example, “variable winning port closing condition” in FIG. 18 is “predetermined number (10) winnings”). In this case, the type of notification selected as “predetermined notification” differs according to “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number”).

  The pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration can change the predetermined notification according to the number of game balls won in excess of the predetermined number, so that the player can determine how many game balls have won the predetermined number. It may be easy to recognize.

(1-6) The pachinko machine 100,
Even if the number of game balls won in the winning means exceeding the predetermined number is the same, the game balls won in the closed state started after the predetermined number of game balls won in the winning means. When the number and the number of game balls won in the closed state, which is started after the winning means has continued the open state for a predetermined time, can be executed with different contents of the predetermined notification. (For example, “special drawing type” in FIG. 18 is “special drawing AD”, “variable winning opening closing condition” is “elapsed time (25 s)”, and “winning after transition to closed state” When “Number” is “3” and “Number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”, “Presentation notification” “Production B” and “Special figure type” are “Special figure A / D” And “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined number (10) winning” and “the number of winnings after shifting to the closed state” is Is 1, "", "director C of" predetermined notification "when the number of winning that exceeds a predetermined number" is "1"")
It is characterized by.

  The pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration is controlled in a closed state by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls by changing a notification mode of a predetermined notification, or for a predetermined time (for example, In some cases, the player can recognize whether or not the closed state has been controlled as a result of 25 s). In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration is configured to provide a difference in the notification mode of the predetermined notification for each opportunity when the winning means shifts to the closed state, the predetermined notification based on any one of the triggers is performed. Sometimes it can be emphasized. For example, if the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration emphasizes a notification when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins and the winning means shifts to a closed state, one round of jackpot game In some cases, the player may be able to impress a player with a sense of satisfaction with a winning ball that has won a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls, that is, so-called over winning. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration has a predetermined number (for example, 10) of notifications when a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) has passed and a predetermined winning means has shifted to a closed state is emphasized. In some cases, a player can be satisfied by notifying that a game ball has been won without shortage.

(1-7) The pachinko machine 100,
The predetermined notification can be executed when a game ball wins the winning means within an effective period set until the winning means is again in the open state.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be easy to understand whether or not it is a winning game ball in the next round by setting an effective period.

(1-8) The pachinko machine 100,
The predetermined notification can be executed only once according to the number of game balls won beyond the predetermined number after the expiration of the effective period (for example, the first sub-control unit award upon receiving the round designation command) (Only one type of effect is selected as “predetermined notification” in accordance with step S1219 of the ball acquisition information generation process and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” shown in FIG. 18)
It is characterized by.

  For example, if a predetermined notification is made for each gaming ball won in excess of a predetermined number (for example, 10), the notifications may overlap and the notification may not be easily communicated to the player. . In such a case, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, at the end of the effective period, the number of winning game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10) is collectively counted, and a predetermined notification is given once. By collectively executing the notification, it may be possible to convey the notification to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration can convey the notification more easily to the player when the predetermined notification is changed depending on the number of winning game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10). There are cases where it is possible.

(1-9) The pachinko machine 100,
When the number of game balls won in excess of the predetermined number is a threshold value (for example, as shown in FIG. 18, the threshold value is “3” in the case of “special drawing A / D”, and the case of “special drawing B / C”. Is greater than or equal to “2”, and in the case of “special drawing EF”, the threshold is “0”). 18 and FIG. 19, “effect X (specific)”, “effect Y (specific)”, “effect Z (probability notification effect)”, “error notification effect”)
It is characterized by.

  There is a limit to the effective period, and if a game ball that is clearly excessively longer than the game ball launch interval wins after the transition to the closed state of the predetermined winning means, illegal acts such as magnet goto (grape goto) are performed. On the other hand, it can be assumed that it can be done accidentally. In such a case, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the predetermined notification is used for notification of an error, or the predetermined notification is used for a premium notification effect that notifies that a rare event has occurred. May be used.

The characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 19 and FIGS. 26 to 32 again.
(2-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
A gaming machine equipped with a winning means (for example, a variable winning port 234),
Provided with notification means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120) capable of notification corresponding to information related to the number of game balls won in the winning means (for example, winning ball acquisition information),
The notifying means is a surplus corresponding to information related to the number of game balls (for example, surplus winning ball acquisition information) when the number of game balls won in the winning means exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10). The notification can be executed in a predetermined time (for example, step S1219 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command).
It is characterized by.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to notify the player as if a special benefit was given. For example, if all winning ball acquisition information is performed each time a winning game ball is detected in the winning means, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the number of winning balls obtained. In such a case, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, the surplus notification based on the winning of the game balls exceeding the predetermined number is notified once or a plurality of times, thereby obtaining the number of winning balls obtained by the game. It may be easier for a person to recognize. In particular, when notifying the surplus notification all at once, the player can easily determine not only the number of prize balls obtained but also the number of prize balls that can be obtained only by winning a predetermined number of game balls. It may be recognized.

(2-2) The pachinko machine 100,
Game ball detecting means (for example, various sensors 320) for detecting a game ball won in the winning means;
The winning means is changed from an open state to a closed state when the game ball detecting means detects the predetermined number of game balls,
The notifying means is characterized in that, when the game ball detecting means detects a game ball after detecting the predetermined number of game balls, the surplus notice can be executed in a predetermined time.

  The pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration notifies the winning ball acquisition information based on winnings in excess of the predetermined number set as the closing condition of the winning means in one time or a plurality of times. For example, there may be a case where it is possible to easily recognize to the player how many prize balls are based on the game balls won in excess of 10) or how much has been won. In particular, when notifying the surplus notification all at once, winning a prize ball based on winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 160 for 16R big hit and 20 for 2R big hit) Information may be recognized by a player.

(2-3) The pachinko machine 100,
The notification means can execute notification of information related to winning every time a winning of a game ball is detected by the gaming ball detection means until the predetermined number of gaming balls win the winning means. (For example, step S1115 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command)
It is characterized by.

  The pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration not only makes it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball has won the prize means during the special game state, but also the number of game balls won to the prize means is predetermined. Since the method of notifying the winning ball acquisition information can be different depending on whether the winning number exceeds the predetermined number, the method of receiving the winning ball information based on the winning number exceeding the predetermined number can be changed. In some cases, notification can make the player have an interest in gaming.

(2-4) The pachinko machine 100,
A winning information storage means (for example, RAM 408) for storing winning information (for example, surplus cumulative number information) regarding winnings exceeding the predetermined number;
The notifying means has changed from the open state to the closed state before the predetermined number of game balls have won the winning means (for example, “a predetermined time (25 s) has passed as a“ variable winning opening closing condition ”). In the event that the winning information is stored in the winning information storage means, the information supplementing the information related to the number of game balls that is less than the predetermined number can be executed. (For example, steps S1203 to S1213, S1217, and S1219 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command)
It is characterized by.

  For example, when a closing condition such as the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) different from a closing condition based on winning of a predetermined number of game balls before a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins, There are cases where a predetermined number of game balls have not won. In such a case, if the winning ball winning information based on the number of winning game balls exceeding the predetermined number is not notified, the winning number of gaming balls that is less than the predetermined number (for example, 10) There is a possibility that the award ball acquisition information corresponding to is notified. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, when the winning information storage means stores the winning information of the game balls exceeding the predetermined number, the winnings exceeding the predetermined number that are scheduled to be notified collectively. In some cases, the player's dissatisfaction can be resolved by making up for the shortage based on the winning ball acquisition information based on the information and notifying the winning ball acquisition information corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning game balls.

(2-5) The pachinko machine 100,
In the case where the prize information is not stored in the prize information storage means, the notifying means is triggered by the fact that the game ball is changed from the open state to the closed state before the predetermined number of game balls are won in the prize means. When the winning information is stored, it is possible to execute a notification supplementing information related to the number of game balls less than the predetermined number (for example, the first when receiving a variable winning mouth winning command) (Steps S1101, S1105 to S1111 and S1115 of the sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process)
It is characterized by.

  When the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration stores the winning information of the game balls exceeding the predetermined number, the number of gaming balls less than the predetermined number is compensated and notified from the winning information, so that the predetermined number of gaming balls When the number of winning prizes is insufficient, it may be possible to prevent notification of winning ball acquisition information including a lack of winning balls. Further, the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration compensates for the award ball acquisition information of less than a predetermined number based on the memorized winning information, so that the award can be achieved while eliminating or reducing the dissatisfaction of the player. In some cases, it is possible to prevent excessive notification of the ball acquisition information and to avoid the danger of notifying the player of the prize ball acquisition information of excessive notification content.

(2-6) The pachinko machine 100,
The winning means is in the open state during a special game state advantageous to the player,
The notification means is capable of executing the surplus notification at the end of the special gaming state (for example, step S1403 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit end command)
It is characterized by.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the prize ball acquisition information of the prize balls based on the winning of the game balls exceeding the predetermined number at the end of the special game state is collectively notified, the prize ball acquisition information is accurately In some cases, notification can be made. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the winning ball acquisition information based on winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 per round) by the player at the first big hit (so-called first hit). Can be recognized.

(2-7) The pachinko machine 100,
The notifying means cumulatively adds the number of prize balls based on the detection of the game ball detecting means as information related to the winning (for example, winning ball acquisition information), and information related to winning and other information. It is possible to report information on the total number of winning balls including.

(2-8) The pachinko machine 100,
When there are more than a predetermined number of winnings in the open state of the winning means, notification of only the winnings (for example, notification effect by an image representing “Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 29 and predetermined sound) can be executed. A game table characterized by being made.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize that the winning of the game ball exceeding the predetermined number is recognized when the winning occurs, In some cases, special games (winning games) can be digested while expecting when the prize ball acquisition information obtained in a collective manner will be notified.

The characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 32 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A determination unit for determining whether or not to determine whether or not a predetermined determination condition is satisfied (for example, special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231));
Special gaming state control means (for example, special figure 2) for controlling to a special gaming state (for example, winning gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result of the winning / non-judgment determination is a specific winning / failing determination result (for example, winning). State update process (step S225) and special figure 1 state update process (step S227)),
Control state transition means (for example, special figure 2 state update process (step S225) for controlling predetermined winning means (for example, variable prize opening 234) from the closed state to the open state based on the transition to the special game state, Special figure 1 state update processing (step S227)),
A game machine equipped with
The predetermined winning means continues the open state for a predetermined time, and the predetermined condition during the closed state is started after a closing condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined number (10) of winnings, a predetermined time has elapsed). Notification effect executing means (for example, speaker 120, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, the notification effects shown in FIGS. 18 and 19) based on the winning of the game ball in the winning means. It is characterized by having.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the player may be interested in winning a game ball while the predetermined winning means is closed. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the player's dissatisfaction with respect to the fact that a prescribed number (predetermined number, for example, 10) of game balls has not won may be solved by a predetermined notification effect. .

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
The notification effect executing means is capable of executing the predetermined notification effect based on the achievement of a predetermined condition related to the number of winning game balls (for example, winning to the variable winning opening 234 after shifting to the closed state). It is characterized by.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
The predetermined notification effect is executed when the number of winning game balls to the predetermined winning means is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  For example, when a predetermined winning means shifts from an open state to a closed state after a predetermined time has elapsed, a prescribed number (predetermined number, for example, 10) of game balls is not in a state of winning a prize. The ball may reach a specified number (predetermined number, for example, 10) by winning. According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, by performing a predetermined notification effect in such a case, it is possible to notify that a predetermined number of game balls have won, so that the dissatisfaction of the player may be reduced. . Further, the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration can improve the interest of the game because a predetermined notification effect can be executed even when the number of winning game balls exceeds a predetermined number (predetermined number, for example, 10). May be possible.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
When either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won or the predetermined time has elapsed in the predetermined winning means, the control state transition means moves the predetermined winning means from the open state. Configured to control to the closed state;
The notification effect executing means is characterized in that the predetermined notification effect can be executed based on the fact that the predetermined number of game balls have won the predetermined winning means during the closed state.

  The pachinko machine 100 having this configuration can execute a predetermined notification effect when the number of winning game balls to a predetermined winning means exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10). May be able to improve the interest of the elderly.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
When the number of game balls won in the predetermined winning means does not exceed a predetermined number (for example, 10), the execution of the notification effect is restricted (for example, “effects” in “predetermined notification effect” in FIG. 18). None ”).

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
The notification effect executing means that the predetermined winning means has won a game ball in the predetermined winning means during the closed state which is started after a predetermined number (for example, ten) of gaming balls have won the predetermined winning means. The predetermined notification effect can be executed based on the above (for example, when the “variable winning opening closing condition” in FIG. 18 is “predetermined number (10) winnings”), Etc.)).

  The pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration can execute a predetermined notification effect when the number of winning game balls to a predetermined winning means exceeds a predetermined number, thereby improving the interest of the player. There are cases where it is possible.

(7) The pachinko machine 100,
The notification effect executing means changes the predetermined notification effect according to the number of game balls won in excess of the predetermined number (for example, the “variable winning opening closing condition” in FIG. ) ”, The effect selected as the“ predetermined notification effect ”differs according to the“ number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number ”).

  The pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration can vary the predetermined notification effect according to the number of game balls won in excess of a predetermined number, so how many game balls have won a predetermined number of games It may be easy for a person to recognize.

(8) The pachinko machine 100,
The notification effect executing means can execute the same predetermined notification effect regardless of the number of game balls won in excess of the predetermined number (for example, “special figure type” in FIG. “A / D”, and when “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “2” or “1”, “the effect C” may be selected as “the predetermined notification effect”) And

(9) The pachinko machine 100,
The notification effect executing means starts after the predetermined number of game balls have won the predetermined winning means even if the number of game balls won by the predetermined winning means exceeds the predetermined number is the same. The predetermined notification when the game ball wins during the closed state and when the game ball wins during the closed state, which is started after the predetermined winning means continues the open state for a predetermined time. Different notice modes of the production (for example, “special drawing type” in FIG. 18 is “special drawing AD”, “variable winning opening closing condition” is “predetermined time (25 s)” and “closed” When “the number of winnings after the state transition” is “3” and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” is “1”, “the effect B” of “the predetermined notification effect” and “the type of special figure” are "Special figure A / D" and "Variable winning opening closing conditions" are "predetermined number (10)" Winning number after the closed state migration "is" 1 "and" the "predetermined notification effect when the number of the winning exceeds a predetermined number" is "1", "" presentation C ")
It is characterized by.

  The pachinko machine 100 having this configuration is controlled to be closed by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls by changing the notification mode of a predetermined notification effect, or for a predetermined time (for example, , 25 s), the player may be able to recognize whether or not the closed state has been controlled. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration has a predetermined notification based on any one of the triggers when the predetermined winning means shifts to the closed state and a difference is provided in the notification mode of the predetermined notification effect. In some cases, the notification effect can be emphasized. For example, if the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration emphasizes a notification effect when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins and a predetermined winning means shifts to a closed state, 1 of the big hit game When it is possible to digest the rounds relatively quickly, and to give the player a sense of satisfaction with the prize ball that the game ball has won a predetermined number (for example, 10), that is, so-called over prize. There is. Further, the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration has a predetermined number (for example, 10) if the notification effect when the predetermined winning means shifts to the closed state after a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) has been emphasized. In some cases, the player can be satisfied by a notification effect informing that the game ball has been won without any shortage.

(10) The pachinko machine 100,
The notification effect executing means is configured to receive the predetermined notification based on a game ball winning in the predetermined winning means within an effective period set until the predetermined winning means is again in the open state. It is characterized by being able to execute the production.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be easy to understand whether or not it is a winning game ball in the next round by setting an effective period.

(11) The pachinko machine 100,
The notification effect execution means can execute the predetermined notification effect only once in accordance with the number of game balls won beyond the predetermined number after the effective period ends (for example, when a round designation command is received). (Only one type of effect is selected as “predetermined notification effect” in accordance with step S1219 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process and “the number of winnings exceeding the predetermined number” shown in FIG. 18)
It is characterized by.

  For example, if a predetermined notification effect is performed for each game ball won in excess of a predetermined number (for example, 10), the notification effects overlap with each other and the notification effect cannot be easily communicated to the player. There is a case. In such a case, according to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, at the end of the effective period, the number of winning game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10) is collectively counted and a predetermined notification effect is given once. By executing all of them together, it may be possible to convey the notification effect to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration changes the predetermined notification effect depending on the number of winning game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, ten), the pachinko machine 100 conveys the notification effect to the player more easily. There are cases where it is possible.

(12) The pachinko machine 100,
The notification effect execution means is configured such that the number of game balls won in excess of the predetermined number is a threshold value (for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of “B / C”, the threshold value is “2”, and in the case of “Special E / F”, the threshold value is “0”). (For example, “effect X (specific)”, “effect Y (specific)”, “effect Z (probability change notification effect)”, “error notification effect” shown in FIGS. 18 and 19))
It is characterized by.

  There is a limit to the effective period, and if a game ball that is clearly excessively longer than the game ball launch interval wins after the transition to the closed state of the predetermined winning means, illegal acts such as magnet goto (grape goto) are performed. On the other hand, it can be assumed that it can be done accidentally. In such a case, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a premium notification that uses a predetermined notification effect for a notification effect that notifies an error or that a rare event occurs is used. It may be used for notification effects.

(13) The pachinko machine 100,
Along with the transition to the special gaming state, a plurality of winning means (for example, variable winning openings 234, 235) that change from the closed state to the open state are provided, and a game ball to the predetermined winning means among the plurality of winning means The predetermined notification effect is executed on the basis of the winning.

(14) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A determination unit for determining whether or not to determine whether or not a predetermined determination condition is satisfied (for example, special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231));
Special gaming state control means (for example, special figure 2) for controlling to a special gaming state (for example, winning gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result of the winning / non-judgment determination is a specific winning / failing determination result (for example, winning). State update process (step S225) and special figure 1 state update process (step S227)),
Control state transition means (for example, special figure 2 state update process (step S225) for controlling predetermined winning means (for example, variable prize opening 234) from the closed state to the open state based on the transition to the special game state, Special figure 1 state update processing (step S227)),
Prize ball acquisition information notifying means (for example, decoration) for notifying a player of prize ball acquisition information including at least one of the number of game balls won in the predetermined winning means and the number of prize balls based on the winning game balls A symbol display device 208, a speaker 120),
A game machine equipped with
The winning ball acquisition information notifying means notifies the surplus winning ball acquisition information based on winnings exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10) in an open state of the predetermined winning means in one time or a plurality of times ( For example, step S1219 of the first sub control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command)
It is characterized by.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to notify the player as if a special benefit was given. For example, if all winning ball acquisition information is performed every time a winning of a game ball to a predetermined winning means is detected, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the number of winning balls obtained. In such a case, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the winning ball obtained by notifying the surplus winning ball acquisition information based on the winning of gaming balls exceeding a predetermined number in one time or a plurality of times. In some cases, the number can be easily recognized by the player. In particular, when notifying the surplus prize ball acquisition information all at once, the player can obtain not only the number of prize balls obtained but also the number of prize balls that can be obtained only by winning a predetermined number of game balls. May be easily recognized.

(15) The pachinko machine 100,
Game ball detecting means (for example, various sensors 320) for detecting a game ball won in the predetermined winning means;
The condition for shifting the control state of the predetermined winning means from the open state to the closed state includes detection of the predetermined number of game balls by the game ball detection means in the open state (for example, “Predetermined number (10) winnings” in the “variable winning opening closing condition” shown in FIG.
The winning ball acquisition information notifying means notifies the surplus winning ball acquisition information based on the fact that the gaming ball detection means has detected a gaming ball after the predetermined number of detections once or a plurality of times. To do.

  The pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration notifies the winning ball acquisition information based on the winnings in excess of the predetermined number set as the closing condition of the predetermined winning means in one or a plurality of times. In some cases, it is possible to easily recognize to the player how many prize balls are based on the game balls won in excess of the number (for example, 10) or how much is won. In particular, when notifying the surplus winning ball acquisition information all at once, it is based on winning of a predetermined number of gaming balls for one special gaming state (for example, 160 for 16R big hit and 20 for 2R big hit). The player may be able to recognize the winning ball acquisition information.

(16) The pachinko machine 100,
The winning ball acquisition information notifying means can notify the winning ball acquisition information every time a game ball winning is detected by the gaming ball detecting means until the predetermined number of gaming balls win the predetermined winning means. Something (for example, step S1115 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command)
It is characterized by.

  The pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration not only makes it easy for the player to recognize that a predetermined winning means has won a game ball during the special gaming state, but also allows the player to recognize the game ball to the predetermined winning means. Since the method of notifying the winning ball acquisition information can be different between the case where the number of winning prizes is a predetermined number and the case where the number of winning prizes exceeds the predetermined number, a prize based on the fact that the number of winning prizes exceeds the predetermined number. In some cases, notification of the ball acquisition information can make the player have an interest in the game.

(17) The pachinko machine 100,
A winning information storage means (for example, RAM 408) for storing winning information (for example, surplus cumulative number information) regarding winnings exceeding the predetermined number;
The winning ball acquisition information notifying unit is configured to display a “predetermined variable winning opening closing condition” as a “predetermined variable winning port closing condition” when the predetermined number of gaming balls are changed from the open state to the closed state before winning the predetermined number. Time (25 s) "is established), and when the prize information is stored in the prize information storage means, the prize ball acquisition information is notified by compensating for less than the predetermined number (for example, round (Steps S1203 to S1213, S1217, and S1219 of the first sub-control unit prize ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the designation command)
It is characterized by.

(18) The pachinko machine 100,
The condition for shifting the control state of the predetermined winning means from the open state to the closed state includes the passage of a predetermined time in the open state (for example, “predetermined time ( 25s, 1s, 0.4s. 0.39s) "), and the control state is configured to shift from the open state to the closed state based on the previously established condition,
The winning ball acquisition information notifying means, when the control state shifts from the open state to the closed state as the predetermined time elapses, the amount less than the predetermined number based on storing the winning information. In addition, the winning ball acquisition information is notified (for example, steps S1203 to S1213, S1217, and S1219 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process when a round designation command is received).
It is characterized by.

(19) The pachinko machine 100,
Winning information storage means (for example, RAM 408) for storing winning information (surplus cumulative number information) related to winnings exceeding the predetermined number;
The winning ball acquisition information notifying means stores the winning information in the winning information storage means when the gaming ball is changed from the open state to the closed state before the predetermined number of game balls are won in the predetermined winning means. If it is, the winning ball acquisition information based on all the winning information is notified (for example, a modification of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 27) (for example, the first sub-control unit award when the round designation command is received) (Steps S1203 to S1213, S1217 and S1219 of the ball acquisition information generation process)
It is characterized by.

  For example, when a closing condition such as the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) different from a closing condition based on winning of a predetermined number of game balls before a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins, There are cases where a predetermined number of game balls have not won. In such a case, if the winning ball winning information based on the number of winning game balls exceeding the predetermined number is not notified, the winning number of gaming balls that is less than the predetermined number (for example, 10) There is a possibility that the award ball acquisition information corresponding to is notified. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, when the winning information storage means stores the winning information of the game balls exceeding the predetermined number, the winnings exceeding the predetermined number that are scheduled to be notified collectively. In some cases, the player's dissatisfaction can be resolved by making up for the shortage based on the winning ball acquisition information based on the information and notifying the winning ball acquisition information corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning game balls.

(20) The pachinko machine 100,
The winning ball acquisition information notifying means stores the winning information in the winning information storage means when the gaming ball is changed from the open state to the closed state before the predetermined number of game balls are won in the predetermined winning means. If not, the winning ball acquisition information is notified by supplementing the amount less than the predetermined number based on storing the winning information (for example, the first sub-control at the time of receiving the variable winning opening winning command) (Steps S1101, S1105 to S1111 and S1115 of the award ball acquisition information generation process)
It is characterized by.

  When the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration stores the winning information of the game balls exceeding the predetermined number, the number of gaming balls less than the predetermined number is compensated and notified from the winning information, so that the predetermined number of gaming balls When the number of winning prizes is insufficient, it may be possible to prevent notification of winning ball acquisition information including a lack of winning balls. Further, the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration compensates for the award ball acquisition information of less than a predetermined number based on the memorized winning information, so that the award can be achieved while eliminating or reducing the dissatisfaction of the player. In some cases, it is possible to prevent excessive notification of the ball acquisition information and to avoid the danger of notifying the player of the prize ball acquisition information of excessive notification content.

(21) The pachinko machine 100,
The winning ball acquisition information notifying means notifies the surplus winning ball acquisition information based on the winnings exceeding the predetermined number at the end of the special gaming state (for example, first sub control unit winning ball acquisition at the time of receiving a big hit end command) Information generation processing step S1403)
It is characterized by.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the prize ball acquisition information of the prize balls based on the winning of the game balls exceeding the predetermined number at the end of the special game state is collectively notified, the prize ball acquisition information is accurately In some cases, notification can be made. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the winning ball acquisition information based on winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 per round) by the player at the first big hit (so-called first hit). Can be recognized.

(22) The pachinko machine 100,
The prize ball acquisition information notifying means cumulatively adds the number of prize balls based on the detection of the game ball detection means as the prize ball acquisition information and includes the prize ball acquisition information and the surplus prize ball acquisition information. Notifying the winning ball acquisition information (for example, step S1403 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the jackpot end command)
It is characterized by.

(23) The pachinko machine 100,
When there are more than a predetermined number of winnings in the open state of the predetermined winning means, a surplus for notifying only the winnings (for example, a notification effect by an image representing “Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 29 and predetermined sound) It is characterized by comprising winning notification means (for example, a speaker 120 and a decorative symbol display device 208).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize that the winning of the game ball exceeding the predetermined number is recognized when the winning occurs, In some cases, special games (winning games) can be digested while expecting when the prize ball acquisition information obtained in a collective manner will be notified.

(24) The pachinko machine 100,
Specific game state giving means for giving a specific game state advantageous to the player after the special game state is completed,
The winning ball acquisition information notifying means is based on a special success / failure determination result (for example, a jackpot relating to “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure D”) among the specific determination results in the specific gaming state. When transitioning to a special game state (for example, special figure high-accuracy state, short-time state), it is notified in addition to the award winning ball information acquired in the previous special game state (for example, when a big hit start command is received) Of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process from step S1001 to step S1003)
It is characterized by.

(25) The pachinko machine 100,
When the transition to the special gaming state is not based on the special winning / failing determination result in the specific gaming state (for example, in the step S1001 of the first sub control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the big hit start command) No),
The award ball acquisition information notification means notifies the award ball acquisition information from an initial value from the special gaming state (for example, a first sub-control unit award ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving a big hit start command) No in step S1001)
It is characterized by.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
The pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment is a game machine installed in an island facility, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the pachinko machine 100 is an enclosed game machine, the same effect as the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment can be obtained.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute a predetermined notification effect using the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to execute a predetermined notification effect using light emitting means such as the frame lamp 122 and the game board lamp 532 and the effect movable body 224. The pachinko machine 100 may be configured to execute a predetermined notification effect by appropriately combining the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, and these lamps and the effect movable body 224.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be configured to change the execution time of a predetermined notification effect according to the number of game balls that have won over. For example, the pachinko machine 100 is configured so that the execution time of a predetermined notification effect is longer when two over-winning game balls are more than one, thereby giving a greater satisfaction to the player. There are cases where it is possible.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to appropriately change a threshold value for determining whether or not to execute a special effect (for example, “effect X (specific)”) as a predetermined notification effect. Also good. For example, in the pachinko machine 100, the driving speed of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, the form of the variable winning opening 234 (door, shutter, etc.), the position of the game ball detecting means (various sensors 320) in the variable winning opening 234, etc. The threshold value may be set to an optimum value.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of game balls won to the variable prize opening 234 that may occur accidentally and the number of game balls won to the variable prize slot 234 that is likely to be fraudulent. The threshold value may be set in consideration. For example, if the threshold value is set to a relatively small value, the pachinko machine 100 can use a specific notification effect as a blessing effect to congratulate the player, whereas the threshold value becomes a relatively large value. If set, it may be used as an error notification effect.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment not only makes the content of the predetermined notification effect other than the specific notification effect different from the effect content of the specific notification effect, but also the predetermined content other than the specific notification effect. The device used for the notification effect and the device used for the specific notification effect may be changed, and the specific notification effect is executed using more devices than the predetermined notification effect other than the specific notification effect. You may be comprised, and it may be comprised so that a specific alerting | reporting effect may be performed with the effect used for another purpose in a game.

  In the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 has been described as an example of the predetermined winning means, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can also apply the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 as predetermined winning means. For example, the pachinko machine 100 has game characteristics such that when the game is in a special game state, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened, and the number of winning game balls to the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The invention can be optimally applied. For example, the present invention can be applied to winning a game ball at the special figure 2 starting port 232 in the electric support state in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that only game balls that have passed through the right-handed downflow path can win the variable winning opening 234, but is not limited thereto. For example, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured so that the game ball can win the variable winning opening 234 regardless of whether the game ball passes through the right-handed down flow path or the left-handed down flow path. It may be arranged on top of 124. Further, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 may be a rotary door body or a shutter type.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a predetermined notification effect is executed based on the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening 234 during the small hit game in the “special drawing G” and the “special drawing H”. It may be configured. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be configured to execute a predetermined notification effect only during a specific jackpot game (for example, the jackpot game of the special figure A or the special figure D).

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a predetermined number of game balls based on the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 and the number of game balls won in the variable prize opening 234 exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10). The notification effect is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, ignoring the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234, a predetermined notification effect is executed based only on the number of winning game balls that exceed a predetermined number (for example, 10) in the variable winning opening 234. May be. In this case, the first sub-control unit 400 may not execute the first sub-control unit flag setting process at the time of receiving the variable winning port closing command shown in FIG. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a notification effect command based on the surplus number information in the process of step S1219 of the first sub-control unit winning ball acquisition information generation process at the time of receiving the round designation command shown in FIG. It only has to be configured.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment notifies the number of winning balls obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening 234 in only the 16 round big hit games of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure D”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, for example, to the variable winning opening 234 in the two-round big hits of “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” and the small hit game of “special drawing G” and “special drawing H”. It may be configured to notify the total number of winning balls including the number of winning balls based on the winning of the game balls.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to select a predetermined notification effect based on the number of winning game balls that exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10) to the variable winning opening 234. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be configured to be able to execute the same predetermined notification effect regardless of the number of game balls that have been won beyond the predetermined number to the variable winning opening 234, for example. Good.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to restrict the execution of a predetermined notification effect when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 does not exceed a predetermined number (for example, 10). It may be.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as a condition for closing the variable winning opening 234, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won and a predetermined time (for example, 25s, 1s, 0) after being opened. .4 s) is set. In the case of the jackpot game related to “Special Figure A” or “Special Figure D”, the opening time of one time of the variable winning opening 234 is, for example, 25 seconds and is set relatively long. For this reason, in the case of a big hit game related to “Special Figure A” or “Special Figure D”, winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is more likely to be established as a closing condition of the variable winning opening 234. It has become. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot game related to “Special Figure B” or “Special Figure C”, the opening time of one time of the variable winning opening 234 is 1 second, for example, “Special Figure E” or “Special Figure E”. In the case of the big hit game according to FIG. F, the opening time of one time of the variable winning opening 234 is, for example, 0.4 seconds. In this way, in the case of the big hit game related to “Special Figure B”, “Special Figure C”, “Special Figure E” or “Special Figure F”, the opening time of the variable winning opening 234 is relatively It is set short. For this reason, in the case of a jackpot game related to “Special Figure B”, “Special Figure C”, “Special Figure E”, or “Special Figure F”, the closing condition of the variable prize opening 234 is a predetermined time (for example, 1 s , 0.4 s) is more likely to be established. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the average number of game balls won within a predetermined time (for example, 1 s, 0.4 s) is set to a predetermined number, and the predetermined number of game balls have been won. This may be set as the closing condition of the variable winning opening 234, or the predetermined number may be adjusted in accordance with the level of the rate at which the prize ball acquisition information is notified collectively.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be configured to notify the prize ball acquisition information by subtracting the number of shots from the prize ball acquisition number based on the winning of the game ball to the variable prize opening 234, It is configured to notify the prize ball acquisition information by adding the number of prize balls based on the winning number of the game balls to the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, or the general prize winning port 226 to the number of prize balls acquired. It may be.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be configured to notify the winning ball acquisition information including the winning ball acquisition number based on the surplus accumulated number only once at the end of the big hit game, or the end of four rounds. You may be comprised so that it may alert | report several times for every. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be configured to notify the prize ball acquisition information when the number of prize balls acquired reaches a predetermined value. The winning ball acquisition information may be notified when the special gaming state ends.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment collectively notifies the winning ball acquisition information based on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, ten) gaming balls have not won the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game. It may be configured. In the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10), not only the shortage but also the winning ball acquisition information can be increased. Therefore, there may be a case where the expectation for eliminating the dissatisfaction of the player and increasing the winning ball acquisition information can be given at the same time.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a predetermined number (for example, 10) to the variable prize opening 234 even when less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have won the variable prize opening 234. The number of winning balls acquired based on the number of winning game balls may be notified. Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the variable winning opening 234 that is easy to over-win, even if there is a shortage in the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234, the amount that can be compensated for afterwards. Game balls may be over-winned, and at the end of the big hit game, it may be possible to notify the original number of winning balls together with the bottom of the book.

  In the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 is described as an example of the predetermined winning means, but the present invention may be applied to the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the special figure 2 starting opening 232 as the predetermined winning means. For example, in the pachinko machine 100 having a game characteristic that increases the number of prize balls by utilizing the opening of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 during the special game state, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is used as a predetermined winning means. It is best to apply

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment collectively reports the number of winning balls obtained based on winning game balls to the variable winning opening 234 as winning ball winning information during the big hit game. The prize ball acquisition information may be notified by adding a prize ball based on the winning number of the game ball to the special figure 2 start opening 232 or the general prize opening 226 to the number of winning prize balls.

  In the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, only the game balls that have passed through the right-handed downflow path can enter the variable winning opening 234, and only the game balls that have passed through the left-handed downflow path can be obtained. The special figure 1 starting port 230 can be awarded. For this reason, when the big hit game is being played, the player makes a right turn to advance the game, so that the game ball rarely wins the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the big hit game, and the special figure 1 Although it is not possible to add a winning ball based on a winning game ball to the starting port 230, winning ball acquisition information including a winning ball winning number based on a winning game ball to the general winning port 226 may be notified. The pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration may increase the number of winning balls when notifying the winning ball acquisition information collectively, and may improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so as to be able to execute an effect of notifying over winning every time there is an over winning. When the number of prize balls acquired based on winning of game balls at a prize opening or start opening other than 234 is included in the prize ball acquisition information, it is possible to perform notification that betrayed the player in a good direction. There is. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment notifies the winning ball acquisition information including the winning ball acquisition number based on the winning of the game ball to the winning port and the starting port other than the variable winning port 234 in the electric support. It may be configured.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may have special means that make it easy for over-winning to occur in order to make use of the features of the present invention. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as the special means, for example, a game ball storage device for guiding the game balls collectively to the variable winning opening 234, or a game ball toward the variable winning opening 234 is substantially variable. A mechanism for winning a prize without spilling to the prize winning opening 234, or a structure for delaying the time until a game ball reaching the variable prize winning opening 234 is detected by a game ball detecting means such as a sensor (game ball) The position of the detection means, the inclination angle of the variable winning opening 234, etc.).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is not limited to the big hit game as the timing for informing the winning ball acquisition information collectively, for example, during the electric support or at the end of the electric support, It may be triggered by a predetermined fluctuation (for example, out of reach, etc.) during the middle or probability change. In particular, the pachinko machine 100 set at a timing for notifying the winning ball acquisition information collectively during a game state that is relatively advantageous to the player but not during a big hit game such as an electric support state, can improve the interest of the game. May be possible. In this case, for example, the number of prize balls acquired based on the winning of game balls to the general prize opening 226 or the special figure 2 start slot 232 may be added to the prize ball acquisition information to be notified collectively. The pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration can notify the player of information on how much the winning ball can be increased in the jackpot game including the electric support state with respect to the winning ball acquisition information. You may be able to improve your interests.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include 1R jackpot as a jackpot game. In the 1R big hit game, the opening / closing of the variable prize opening 234 may be executed only once during a round, or may be executed a plurality of times.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to arbitrarily set the extension or shortening of the effective period within the interval time. For this reason, the whole period in the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game may be set as the effective period, or a partial period in the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 may be set as the effective period. . For example, a predetermined period after the variable winning opening 234 is closed may be set as an effective period, and after the predetermined period elapses until the end of the interval time may be set as an ineffective period. The pachinko machine 100 is configured not to make a game ball enter the variable prize opening 234 within the ineffective period.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.
The game machine according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 34, “a plurality of reels 1002 provided with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels”. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And a determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it corresponds to the predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position where the variable display device 1022 is shielded And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 changes the design when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins. It is also suitable for a slot machine 1000 ”which is a presentation device 1010 that produces a game by stopping and displaying the game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 35 (a). “Insert bills into bill insertion slot 2002, execute lottery based on bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display lottery result on lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

The game table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.
(Appendix 1)
A game machine with winning means,
A gaming table characterized in that a predetermined notification can be executed when a game ball wins the winning means during a closed state that is started after the open state is continued for a predetermined time.
(Appendix 2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1,
A game table characterized in that the predetermined notification can be executed when a predetermined condition relating to the number of winning game balls is achieved.
(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 2,
The winning means changes from the open state to the closed state even when a predetermined number of game balls have won,
The predetermined notification can be executed when the predetermined number of game balls are won in the winning means during the closed state that is started after the open state is continued for a predetermined time. Stand.
(Appendix 4)
A game machine according to appendix 3,
The game is characterized in that the predetermined notification can be executed when a game ball wins the winning means during a closed state that starts after the predetermined number of game balls win the winning means. Stand.
(Appendix 5)
A game machine according to appendix 3 or 4,
The game table is characterized in that it can be executed with different contents of the predetermined notification depending on the number of game balls won in excess of the predetermined number.
(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
Even if the number of game balls won in the winning means exceeding the predetermined number is the same, the game balls won in the closed state started after the predetermined number of game balls won in the winning means. When the number and the number of game balls won in the closed state, which is started after the winning means has continued the open state for a predetermined time, can be executed with different contents of the predetermined notification. A game table characterized by
(Appendix 7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
It is a game stand of any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6, Comprising:
The predetermined notification can be executed when a game ball wins the winning means within an effective period set before the winning means is again in the open state. Stand.
(Appendix 8)
A gaming machine according to appendix 7,
The game table characterized in that the predetermined notification can be executed only once in accordance with the number of game balls won beyond the predetermined number after the effective period.
(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 5 to 8,
A game table characterized in that a specific notification can be executed as the predetermined notification when the number of game balls won in excess of the predetermined number exceeds a threshold value.
(Appendix 10)
A game machine with winning means,
Informing means capable of informing corresponding to information related to the number of game balls won in the winning means,
The notifying means is configured to be able to execute a surplus notice corresponding to information related to the number of game balls when the number of game balls won in the winning means exceeds a predetermined number in a predetermined time. A characteristic game stand.
(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to appendix 10, wherein
A game ball detecting means for detecting a game ball won in the winning means;
The winning means is changed from an open state to a closed state when the game ball detecting means detects the predetermined number of game balls,
The game table is configured such that, when the game ball detecting unit detects a game ball after detecting the predetermined number of game balls, the surplus notification can be executed in a predetermined time. .
(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11,
The notification means can execute notification of information related to winning every time a winning of a game ball is detected by the gaming ball detection means until the predetermined number of gaming balls win the winning means. A game stand characterized by this.
(Appendix 13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 10 to 12,
Winning information storage means for storing winning information relating to winnings exceeding the predetermined number;
When the winning information is stored in the winning information storage means, the notifying means is triggered by the opening state being changed to the closed state before the predetermined number of game balls are won in the winning means. The game table is characterized in that it is possible to perform a notification supplementing information related to the number of game balls that is less than the predetermined number.
(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to appendix 13,
In the case where the prize information is not stored in the prize information storage means, the notifying means is triggered by the fact that the game ball is changed from the open state to the closed state before the predetermined number of game balls are won in the prize means. The game table is characterized in that, when the winning information is stored, it is possible to execute a notification supplementing information related to the number of game balls less than the predetermined number.
(Appendix 15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 10 to 14,
The winning means is in the open state during a special game state advantageous to the player,
The game table characterized in that the notification means is capable of executing the surplus notification at the end of the special gaming state.
(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 10 to 15,
The notification means relates to the total number of winning balls including information related to the winning and other information by cumulatively adding the number of winning balls based on the detection of the gaming ball detecting means as information related to the winning. A game stand characterized by being capable of performing information reporting.
(Appendix 17)
A gaming machine according to appendix 16,
A gaming machine characterized in that when a predetermined number of winnings are received in the open state of the winning means, notification of only the winnings can be performed.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decorative symbol display device 208a Left symbol display area 208b Middle symbol display area 208c Right symbol display area 208d Effect display area 208d1 Special figure 1 hold display area 208d2 Special figure 2 hold display area 226 General prize opening 228 Figure starting port 230 Special figure 1 starting port 232 Special figure 2 starting port 234 Variable winning port 300 Main control unit 400 First sub control unit 500 Second sub control unit 800 Prize ball acquisition number display area 810 Round display area 820 Winning number display region

Claims (6)

A game machine with winning means,
Informing means capable of informing corresponding to information related to the number of game balls won in the winning means,
The notifying means is configured to be able to execute a surplus notice corresponding to information related to the number of game balls when the number of game balls won in the winning means exceeds a predetermined number in a predetermined time. A characteristic game stand. The game table according to claim 1,
A game ball detecting means for detecting a game ball won in the winning means;
The winning means is changed from an open state to a closed state when the game ball detecting means detects the predetermined number of game balls,
The game table is configured such that, when the game ball detecting unit detects a game ball after detecting the predetermined number of game balls, the surplus notification can be executed in a predetermined time. . The game stand according to claim 2,
The notification means can execute notification of information related to winning every time a winning of a game ball is detected by the gaming ball detection means until the predetermined number of gaming balls win the winning means. A game stand characterized by this. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
Winning information storage means for storing winning information relating to winnings exceeding the predetermined number;
When the winning information is stored in the winning information storage means, the notifying means is triggered by the opening state being changed to the closed state before the predetermined number of game balls are won in the winning means. The game table is characterized in that it is possible to perform a notification supplementing information related to the number of game balls that is less than the predetermined number. The game table according to claim 4,
In the case where the prize information is not stored in the prize information storage means, the notifying means is triggered by the fact that the game ball is changed from the open state to the closed state before the predetermined number of game balls are won in the prize means. The game table is characterized in that, when the winning information is stored, it is possible to execute a notification supplementing information related to the number of game balls less than the predetermined number. A game table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The winning means is in the open state during a special game state advantageous to the player,
The game table characterized in that the notification means is capable of executing the surplus notification at the end of the special gaming state.

Images